JP2020199367A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine enabling a player to continue playing a game without getting bored.SOLUTION: A Pachinko slot machine 1 executes flag lottery processing by using a CT meter within a CT. The CT meter includes "1" to "7" "MAX" and is controlled to a state for always winning a flag conversion lottery when the CT meter reaches the MAX. The CT meter MAX state is completed when a completion condition is satisfied. If the CT meter MAX state is completed, a value of the CT meter is updated to "7", then the CT meter can be updated to the CT meter MAX immediately after that simply by promotion of the CT meter by one.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 103

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so that the role determined as the internal winning combination is not missed. There is. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). Further, a game machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay time (RT) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is high is sometimes called an ART machine or the like.

According to a game machine equipped with such an AT function and an ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation, so that the player can perform the AT or ART. You will want the period to last for a long time.

Therefore, in recent years, ingenuity to increase the period of AT and ART has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Patent Document 1, when a specific role such as watermelon or cherry is determined as an internal winning role, AT A game machine that increases the number of games is disclosed. According to this game machine, since the number of AT games increases according to the internal winning combination, the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and plays the game, which improves the interest of the game.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-057732

However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, the game playability tends to be monotonous.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of continuing a game without getting bored by the player.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and an internal winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations and a player's stop operation. A gaming machine that advances a game using the reel by stopping the rotation of the reel according to the mode, and is a notification means (for example, an information display 14) capable of notifying a mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player. , Display unit 100, main control board 71, sub-control board 72), and game control means (for example, main control board 71) capable of controlling a specific game (for example, CT) capable of executing notification by the notification means. In the specific game, the count value of the special meter (for example, CT meter) can be changed in a predetermined fluctuation value by a variable means (for example, the main control board 71), and in the specific game, the count value of the special meter is a specific value (for example). For example, when MAX) is reached, the advantageous state starting means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of starting an advantageous advantageous state as compared with the case where the count value of the special meter does not reach the specific value, and the advantageous state. When the end condition is satisfied in the state, the advantageous state ending means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of ending the advantageous state is provided, and the variable means counts the special meter when the advantageous state ends. In a unit game in which the value fluctuates to a predetermined value (for example, "7") that does not reach the specific value and the count value of the special meter is the predetermined value, the special meter is the player by the predetermined fluctuation value. It is characterized in that the count value of the special meter reaches the specific value when it is changed in a direction favorable to the reel.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the variable means can change the count value of the special meter according to an internal winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations, and the next advantageous state is completed. Also in a unit game, the count value of the special meter can be changed by the minimum value of the predetermined fluctuation values in a direction advantageous to the player.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to continue playing a game without getting bored.

It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is an overall perspective view which shows the external structure of the pachislot machine. It is an overall front view which shows the external structure of the pachislot machine. It is a schematic layout drawing inside the housing of the pachislot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the said pachislot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the said pachislot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship between a projector mechanism and a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mounting state of a mirror mechanism. It is a vertical sectional view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of the front screen mechanism. It is a perspective view of the front screen mechanism. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the opening for operation. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to the fixed screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to the front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to the rear screen mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of the front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the right side plate of the screen housing. It is a perspective view of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operating state of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is a figure which shows a part of the display screen displayed on the sub display device of the pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the auxiliary control board of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state regarding the presence / absence of notification of the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can stop and display. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can stop and display. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can stop and display. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can stop and display. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can stop and display. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can stop and display. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the abbreviation of the winning role in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the general game state in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal medium-high probability lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CZ lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the mode-up lottery table in CZ1 stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the point-up lottery table in CZ2 stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in a normal ART in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in ART stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART level determination table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal ART medium and high probability lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CT lottery table in ART stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table in a normal ART stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CT in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table during CT stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in CT stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table in CT stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table which adds the number of sets in CT stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the bonus in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the bonus type lottery table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table which added the number of ART games in the bonus stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CT lottery table at the end of a bonus stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the exceptional game in the general game state in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table during non-ART stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the notification performed on the main side and the notification performed on the sub side in the pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the control process according to the state of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flag conversion process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the normal middle start processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the start in CZ of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ1 (CZ2) middle processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ1 (CZ2) middle processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ3 middle processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the start of a normal ART of the pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the start of CT of the pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the start of BB of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop initial setting process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop control processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the BB check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the RT check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the RT check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ / ART end processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-side navigation control processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the player registration process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the history management process of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the display screen of the sub display device of the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the CT precursor in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the actually displayed symbol combination in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the actually displayed symbol combination in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in normal ART stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table in ART which is stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game during CT in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in CT stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the CT meter promotion lottery table in CT stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table in CT which is stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CZ in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the CZ2 end lottery table stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the lock lottery table stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the CT precursor in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the content of the notification during the MB flag in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the correspondence relation between the notification performed on the main side and the notification performed on the sub side in a pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the lock state and notification in the pachislot machine of a modification.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine showing an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium. Further, in the present embodiment, an assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT"), which is a function for navigating the formation of a specific small winning combination with a lamp or the like, and a function in which the replay probability is higher than usual during a specific number of plays. A pachislot machine having an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as "ART") function in which the RT and the RT are operated at the same time will be described.

[Functional flow of pachislot machines]
As shown in FIG. 1, when a medal is inserted by a player and the start lever 6 is operated, the pachi-slot machine 1 has one value (for example, 0 to 65535) from a random number in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535). Hereinafter, a random number value) is extracted.

The internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 31 described later) draws a lot based on the extracted random number value, and determines the internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination determining means has a predetermined winning probability from a plurality of combinations based on the detection of the start operation of the unit game with respect to the start lever 6 by the start switch 6S (see FIG. 30) (establishment of a predetermined start condition). To determine the internal winning role.

By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the winning line described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning" in which benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, and bonus operation are given to the player, and other so-called "losses". Such things are provided.

Subsequently, after the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotated, when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R are pressed by the player, the reel stop control means (main CPU 31, described later, motor drive circuit described later). 39, the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R) described later control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are pressed. Do.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, and 3R within a specified time (190 msec) from the time when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R are pressed. .. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R within the specified time is called the "number of sliding pieces", and the maximum number thereof is equivalent to four symbols (maximum number of sliding pieces). ).

When the internal winning combination that permits the display of the combination of symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means uses the above-mentioned specified time to set the combination of the symbols to the winning line (hereinafter, "effective line"). The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so as to be displayed as much as possible.

On the other hand, for combinations of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination, the reels are used within the maximum number of sliding pieces so that they will not be displayed along the effective line using the above specified time. Stop the rotation of 3L, 3C and 3R.

When all the rotations of the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped in this way, the winning determination means (main CPU 31 described later) determines whether the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line is related to the winning. Judge whether or not.

That is, the winning determination means determines the winning or non-winning of the winning combination based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line based on the fact that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means.

When it is determined that the prize is related to a prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out a medal. The series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachislot machine 1.

In the present embodiment, the reel stop operation (operation of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that is first performed when all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotating is the first stop operation and the first stop operation. The stop operation performed after the stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed after the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in the series of flows described above, various effects can be produced by using the light (video) output performed by the display unit 100, the sound output performed by the speakers 9L and 9R, or a combination thereof. Will be done.

When the start lever is operated, a random value for effect (hereinafter, random value for effect) is extracted in addition to the random value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines by lottery what to execute this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. The sub-control board, which will be described later, is responsible for determining the content of the effect.

When the content of the effect is determined, the display unit 100 and the speakers 9L and 9R execute the corresponding effect in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the reel starts rotating, when the rotation of each reel stops, and when it is judged whether or not there is a prize. To do. In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination, the game has an opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at). It is provided to the player and can improve the interest of the player.

[Structure of pachislot machine]
This concludes the description of the functional flow of the pachislot machine 1. Next, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3.

FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

The housing 60 forming the entire pachi-slot machine 1 includes a box-shaped cabinet 61 having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door 62a arranged on the upper front surface of the cabinet 61, and a lower front surface of the cabinet 61. It has a lower door 62b arranged in. The cabinet 61 accommodates equipment used for games (for example, reels). The upper door 62a and the lower door 62b are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet 61. The upper door 62a is provided so that the upper part of the opening in the cabinet 61 can be closed, and the lower door 62b is provided so as to be able to close the lower part of the opening in the cabinet 61.

The upper door 62a has a display unit 100 in the center. The display unit 100 is an effect device that produces an effect according to the progress of the game, and displays various images according to the progress of the game under the control of the sub-control board 72 described later. The display unit 100 may be a display device such as a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, but in the present embodiment, a so-called projection mapping device is used as described later.

A display window 4 formed as a rectangular opening is provided in a substantially central portion of the upper portion of the lower door 62b. The display window 4 constitutes a symbol display means for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, which will be described later. In the display window 4, a cross-up line diagonally to the upper right, a top line in the upper row, a center line in the middle row, a bottom line in the lower row, and a cross-down line diagonally downward to the right are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 3, the display window 4 displays three symbols out of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Therefore, the display window 4 displays a 3 × 3 pattern. The five lines from the cross-up line to the cross-down line displayed on the display window 4 are lines that linearly connect the 3 × 3 symbols displayed on the display window 4.

In the present embodiment, the center line out of these five lines is the effective line, and the winning determination is made based on the combination of the symbols displayed along the center line. On the other hand, the four lines other than the center line are pseudo lines that are not used for determining the winning.

The effective line (center line) is activated by operating the MAX bet button 11 described later or by inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 22. Here, operating the MAX bet button 11 is synonymous with inserting a medal. Therefore, for example, the term "number of inserted medals" includes both the number of BETs inserted by operating the MAX bet button 11 and the number of inserted medals actually inserted into the medal insertion slot 22.

A plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatably provided in a horizontal row in the cabinet 61. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has a reel band on which a sequence of symbols as identification information composed of a plurality of types of symbols necessary for the game is drawn on the outer peripheral surface thereof. That is, a plurality of symbols are displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

The design drawn on each reel band can be visually recognized from the outside of the pachislot machine 1 through the display window 4. Further, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R rotates at a constant speed rotation (for example, 80 rotations / minute), and the symbol sequence is displayed in a variable manner.

A pedestal portion 10 having a substantially horizontal plane is formed below the display window 4. A medal insertion slot 22 is provided on the right side of the horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 10, and a MAX bet button 11 and a 1-bet button (not shown) are provided on the left side. Inside the MAX bet button 11, a bet button LED 103 (see FIG. 30) that lights up when a medal can be inserted is provided.

By pressing the MAX bet button 11, the number of medals (3 medals) used for the unit game (one game) is inserted, and the effective line is activated. On the other hand, one medal is inserted each time the 1-bet button is pressed once. When the 1-bet button is operated three times, three medals used for the unit game are inserted and the effective line is activated.

The operation of the MAX bet button 11, the operation of the 1-bet button, and the operation of inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 22 (operations of inserting medals to perform a game) are referred to as "insertion operations".

An information display 14 is provided at substantially the center of the pedestal portion 10 in the horizontal plane. The information display 14 is provided with an LED (not shown) that lights up according to the number of medals inserted in this game (hereinafter referred to as the number of inserted medals). In addition, information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter, the number of medals to be paid out) and the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter, the number of credits) is displayed on the information display 14. There is a digital display (not shown) that digitally displays the information to the player.

Further, the information display 14 is provided with an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying information on the stop operation required to display the combination of symbols according to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination along the effective line. It is provided. The instruction monitor is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and notifies the player of necessary stop operation information by lighting or blinking in a manner uniquely corresponding to the stop operation information to be notified. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, a "pushing order combination" is provided, which is a combination in which the combinations of symbols displayed according to the order of the stop operations (pushing order) are different. The mode that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified is, for example, to display "1" when notifying the push order "1st (performing the first stop operation on the left reel 3L)". , "2nd" is displayed when notifying the push order "2nd (performing the first stop operation on the reel 3C in the middle)", and the push order "3rd (the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R)" is displayed. To do) ”is displayed as“ 3 ”. The details of the notification of the stop operation information on the instruction monitor will be described later in FIG. 74.

As shown in FIG. 30 described later, the information display 14 is controlled by the main control board 71 via the door relay board 74. Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 71, other means controlled by the sub-control board 72 may be used to notify the information of the stop operation, for example. The display unit 100 described above may notify the information of the stop operation.

In this case, the mode of notification in the instruction monitor and the mode of notification in other means may be different. That is, the instruction monitor may be notified in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified, and it is not always necessary to directly notify the information of the stop operation (for example, "1" in the instruction monitor. Even if it is displayed, it may not be possible to specify the content of the notification depending on the player, so it cannot be said to be a direct notification). On the other hand, in the notification by other means, the information of the stop operation may be directly notified. For example, when the push order "1st" is notified, the instruction monitor displays "1" which is uniquely corresponding to the push order to be notified, while the other means (display unit 100) displays the first stop operation on the left. It may be possible to directly notify what is to be done to the reel 3L of the above.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, information on the necessary stop operation according to the internal winning combination can be notified not only by the control of the sub-control board 72 but also by the control of the main control board 71. Of course, the notification of the stop operation information may be controlled according to the gaming state. More specifically, the stop operation information may be notified in the ART game state (see FIG. 33) described later without notifying the stop operation information in the general gaming state (non-ART) described later.

Further, on the left side of the front portion of the pedestal portion 10, a settlement button 13 for switching the credit / payout of medals acquired by the player in the game by a push button operation is provided. By switching the settlement button 13, medals are paid out from the medal payout outlet 15 at the lower part of the front surface, and the paid out medals are stored in the medal receiving portion 16.

On the right side of the settlement button 13, a start lever 6 is specified as a start operation means for rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by a player's tilt operation to start variable display of a symbol in the display window 4. It is mounted so that it can be tilted within the angle range of.

Stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R are provided at substantially the center of the front surface of the pedestal portion 10 as stop operation means for stopping the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by pressing the player. ing. In the embodiment, one game (unit game) is basically started by operating the start lever 6 and ends when all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped.

A first sub-display device 201 and a second sub-display device 202 are provided on the front surface of the upper part of the lower door 62b. The first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device 202 are a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, and display various information. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device 202 are lateral to the front surface of the lower door 62b, which stands substantially perpendicular to the horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 10. The first sub-display device 201 is provided on the left side (MAX bet button 11 and start lever 6 side), and the second sub-display device 202 is provided on the right side (medal insertion slot 22 side).

At least one of the first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device 202, in the present embodiment, a touch sensor 201a is provided on the display surface of the first sub-display device 201, via the touch sensor 201a. The display can be switched according to the operation of the accepted player. The touch sensor 201a operates according to a predetermined operating principle such as a capacitance method, and when it receives an operation of a player, it outputs a signal corresponding to the operation as touch input information. The first sub-display device 201 is controlled by the sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 31) based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor 201a.

Speakers 9L and 9R for producing sounds such as sound effects and voices are provided on the left and right in front of the lower part of the lower door 62b, and a medal payout outlet 15 for paying medals is provided between the speakers 9L and 9R. ing. At the bottom of the lower door 62b, a medal receiving portion 16 for storing the paid medals is provided.

In addition, on the front surface of the lower part of the lower door 62b, which is sandwiched between the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R and the medal receiving portion 16, a lumbar panel 25 with a design corresponding to the motif of the model is placed. It is attached. The lumbar panel 25 is illuminated by a lumbar panel illuminator (not shown) provided behind it.

[Display unit structure]
Subsequently, the structure of the display unit 100 included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 28.

(Display unit 100)
As shown in FIG. 4, a display unit 100 is provided inside the cabinet 61 on the rear side of the upper door 62a. As shown in FIG. 5, the display unit 100 is detachably provided on the intermediate support plate 301 in the cabinet 61. The intermediate support plate 301 functions as a partition wall between the upper space and the lower space in the cabinet 61. The display unit 100 is a so-called projection mapping device having an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light including an image and a screen device C that causes an image to appear when the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is irradiated. ..

Here, the projection mapping device is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object, and for example, the position (projection distance or angle) of an accessory which is a screen described later. By projecting an image according to the production information, which is generated based on the shape and shape, it is possible to produce an advanced and powerful production.

(Display unit 100: Illumination light device B)
As shown in FIG. 6, the irradiation light device B is arranged in front of the projector mechanism B2 that emits the irradiation light forward and the projector mechanism B2, and the irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2 is arranged diagonally downward and rearward. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects in the device C direction, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit 100: Illumination light device B: Projector mechanism B2)
The projector mechanism B2 is arranged at the rear part in the cabinet 61. The projector mechanism B2 has a horizontally arranged flat plate-shaped base member B22. A lens mechanism B21 and a light source (not shown) are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The lens mechanism B21 is arranged so as to emit the irradiation light emitted from the light source toward the front mirror mechanism B3.

Further, heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 are arranged on the right side and the left side of the lens mechanism B21 and the light source, respectively. The heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 have a duct for passing air and a fan for sending out air, and by blowing the air backward, the heat generated when the irradiation light is generated is forcibly pushed backward. It is designed to flow. As shown in FIG. 2, the ventilation holes 21a of the cabinet 61 are arranged in the air flow direction in the heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24. As a result, the heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 can forcibly discharge the heat of the projector mechanism B2 together with the air to the outside of the machine through the ventilation hole 21a.

(Display unit 100: Illumination light device B: Mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 6, the mirror mechanism B3 is arranged in front of the projector mechanism B2 (the emission direction of the irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 7, the mirror mechanism B3 includes a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 housed in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. doing. As shown in FIG. 8, the mirror holder B31 is formed in the shape of a rectangular plate on the front surface. An angle adjusting hole B311 is formed at each corner of the mirror holder B31, and a recess B312 is formed on the front surface centering on the angle adjusting hole B311. Further, mounting holes B314 and B314 are formed vertically symmetrically between the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 in the vertical direction.

Further, a mirror holding portion B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding portion B313 is formed in the central portion, and is formed in a size that does not overlap the angle adjusting hole B311 and the mounting hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are provided on the left side and the right side of the mirror holding portion B313, respectively. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjusting holes B331, B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344 in the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are arranged so as to correspond to the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 and the mounting holes B314 and B314 in the mirror holder B31.

The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are partially formed so as to overlap the mirror holding portion B313. As a result, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 come into contact with both left and right sides of the optical mirror B32 fitted to the mirror holding portion B313, and are screwed to the mirror holder B31 through the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344. , The optical mirror B32 is held by the mirror holder B31.

As shown in FIG. 9, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11 in the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed in the front central portion of the projector cover B1 and is arranged so as to be exposed to the front side when the upper door 62a is opened. The reflector holding portion B11 has an angle adjusting hole B111. The angle adjusting hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

A screw (not shown) is inserted into the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 from the front side, and this screw penetrates the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed, and the screws penetrating the angle adjusting holes B311 of the mirror holder B31 are the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. It is screwed into the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341.

Then, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw with the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is increased. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw with the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 is tightened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is shortened.

As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are screwed together via the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344, whereby the optical mirror is formed between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. B32 is sandwiched. In this way, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are integrated as a mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is changed by the rotation of the screw. As a result, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Since the angle adjusting holes B311 and 331 and B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corners of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism at the arrangement positions of the angle adjusting holes B311, 331 and B341 are arranged. By increasing or decreasing the distance from B3, it is possible to finely adjust the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector mechanism B2.

Further, a spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring is in contact with the recess B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface is in contact with the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding portion B11, so that the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31 It is sandwiched between. Then, a screw inserted through the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 penetrates the spring. As a result, even if the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases as the screw rotates, the screw head comes into contact with the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 due to the urging force of the spring. It is possible to prevent the screw head from protruding from the angle adjusting hole B111 and breaking the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw.

(Display unit 100: Illumination light device B: Projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 10, the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above are housed in the projector cover B1. The projector cover B1 includes a horizontally arranged upper wall portion B12, a reflector holding portion B11 arranged on the front side of the upper wall portion B12, and side wall portions B13 and B13 arranged symmetrically in the left-right direction of the upper wall portion B12. And have. The front portion of the upper wall portion B12 projects forward from the cabinet 61 of FIG. A reflector holding portion B11 is formed in a form protruding forward in the central portion of the front side of the upper wall portion B12, and the above-mentioned mirror mechanism B3 is held in a space formed by the protrusion so that the angle can be adjusted. ..

Further, the side wall portions B13 and B13 have a protruding portion B131 protruding in the horizontal direction from the lower end portion. The protruding portion B131 has a first protruding portion B131a on the front side and a second protruding portion B131b on the rear side. The first protrusion B131a is formed at a position corresponding to the opening of the cabinet 61 when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet 61, and is set to a width slightly smaller than the width of the opening of the cabinet 61. Has been done. On the other hand, the second protrusion B131b is formed at a position corresponding to the space behind the opening of the cabinet 61 when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet 61, and is wider than the width of the space behind. It is set to a slightly smaller width. That is, each of the side wall portions B13 and B13 is formed so that the width of the second protruding portion B131b is wider than the width of the first protruding portion B131a. As a result, the projector cover B1 can cover most of the internal space in the cabinet 61.

A perforated plate B15 having a plurality of holes B151 is provided on the lower surface side of the projector cover B1. The perforated plate B15 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by punching a plate made of metal (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum, etc.). The plurality of holes B151 are formed so as to be substantially evenly dispersed on the entire surface of the perforated plate B15. The perforated plate B15 allows air to flow over the entire surface of the perforated plate B15, and enables air to flow from the lower side to the upper side by suction by the heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 of the projector mechanism B2. The size and number of holes B151 are set so that the inside of the projector cover B1 cannot be visually recognized from the outside. The hole B151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, or a hexagon, and the hole diameter is about 3 to 5 mm.

The perforated plate B15 is formed so as to cover the first protruding portion B131a and the second protruding portion B131b of the projector cover B1 from the lower position. As shown in FIG. 12, the perforated plate B15 has an upper portion B15a on the front side, an inclined portion B15b on the middle side, and a lower portion B15c on the rear side. The upper portion B15a is horizontally arranged. The inclined portion B15b is formed by being bent diagonally downward and rearward from the rear side of the upper portion B15a. The lower side portion B15c is formed by being bent in the horizontal direction from the rear side of the inclined portion B15b.

The upper portion B15a of the perforated plate B15 is attached to the side wall portions B13 and B13 of the projector cover B1. As a result, the perforated plate B15 is arranged so that the front portion of the projector cover B1 is covered from the lower side by the upper portion B15a, and the inclined portion B15b and the lower portion B15c cover the front portion of the projector cover B1 from the lower portion to the rear portion. There is. As shown in FIG. 10, a front screen mechanism E1 in the screen device C is arranged below the perforated plate B15.

Although the details will be described later, the front screen mechanism E1 has a front standby position arranged on the upper side, which is a standby posture for prohibiting the appearance of an image due to irradiation light, and a lower side, which is an exposure posture for allowing the appearance of an image due to irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby posture is tilted so as to be substantially parallel to the tilted portion B15b of the perforated plate B15 so as to be rotatable between the front exposed position and the exposed position. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed posture, a large space portion appears below the perforated plate B15, and the air existing in this space reaches the perforated plate B15 without flow resistance, and a plurality of spaces are present. By passing through the hole B151, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of air into the screen device C and improve the cooling efficiency.

Further, by providing the perforated plate B15 so as to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1, for example, as shown in FIG. 13, the position of the player's line of sight located on the front side is the center of the screen device C in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. Even if it exists on the horizontal line of the portion and looks up at the irradiation light device B from this line-of-sight position, the perforated plate B15 prevents the inside of the irradiation light device B from being visually observed.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 14, the irradiation light device B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screwing. As a result, the display unit 100 can unite the irradiation light device B and the screen device C and handle them integrally.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10)
The screen device C has a box-shaped screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 15, the screen housing C10 includes a horizontally arranged bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2 erected at the right end of the bottom plate C1, and a left side plate C3 erected at the left end of the bottom plate C1. And a back plate C4 erected at the rear end of the bottom plate C1. As a result, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are connected to the bottom plate C1 by screwing, so that the front side where the player is located and the upper surface side where the irradiation light device B is located are connected. An open box-shaped screen housing C10 is formed.

The bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 constituting the screen housing C10 are each independently formed into a predetermined shape, and a predetermined functional component such as a fixed screen mechanism D can be attached. Has been made. As a result, even if the unit of the screen device C cannot be standardized as a whole, the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 can be standardized for each plate member. Further, since it is possible to partially change each plate member, it is possible to easily change the specifications for each model of the game machine 1.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Bottom plate C1)
Specifically, the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape having a rectangular top view. The upper surface of the bottom plate C1 has a central mounting portion C11 arranged in the central portion, and a right mounting portion C12 and a left mounting portion C13 arranged in the left-right direction about the central mounting portion C11. There is. These mounting portions C11, C12, and C13 are formed in a concave shape. The central mounting portion C11 mounts the fixed screen mechanism D so that it can be positioned by fitting the lower end portion of the fixed screen mechanism D. The right mounting portion C12 and the left mounting portion C13 position the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, respectively, by fitting the lower ends of the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, respectively. It is placed as possible.

Further, the front side portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward so that the tip portion thereof is positioned below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front side portion C14. As shown in FIG. 5, when the display unit 100 is mounted on the intermediate support plate 301 of the cabinet 61 and incorporated, the front side portion C14 abuts on the front surface of the intermediate support plate 301 in the cabinet 61. It is possible to perform rearward positioning. Then, the display unit 100 is screwed to the front surface of the cabinet 61 through the through hole C141 of the front side portion C14, so that the display unit 100 can be assembled and installed from the front side of the cabinet 61. It is possible.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Right side plate C2, Left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit 100 can be carried by hooking a hand on the operation openings C21 and C31. The operating openings C21 and C31 are arranged on the sides of the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operating openings C21 and C31 are formed in a rectangular shape in which the longitudinal directions are aligned in the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operating openings C21 and C31 are set so that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from the outside.

As a result, when manually moving the front screen mechanism E1 in the standby position after incorporating the display unit 100 into the cabinet 61, first, the display unit 100 is taken out from the front side of the cabinet 61 in which the upper door 62a is opened. Specifically, an operator located on the front side of the cabinet 61 releases the screws of the display unit 100 to the cabinet 61 and removes the screws. Then, the display unit 100 is taken out of the cabinet 61 by reaching into the cabinet 61 and grasping the operating openings C21 and C31 of the display unit 100 with both hands. After that, as shown in FIG. 17, for example, reaching into the screen device C from one of the operating openings C21 of the removed display unit 100, and rotating the crank gear E21 that can be seen in the horizontal direction from the operating opening C21. As a result, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. The locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 will be described later. When the locked state is released by moving from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly rotated to a desired position.

With the upper door 62a open, reach out from the front of the opening of the cabinet 61 into the space between the side wall 302 of the cabinet 61 and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C, and from the operation opening C21. By operating the crank gear E21, the crank gear E21 can be rotated. In this case, the locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 can be released without removing the display unit 100 from the cabinet 61.

Further, a motor accommodating portion C22 is formed on the right side plate C2. The motor accommodating portion C22 accommodates the drive motor F21 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 18, the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and a relay board CK is provided on the back surface. The relay board CK makes it possible to collect a plurality of signal lines in the display unit 100 and perform wiring to the outside of the display unit 100 at one place. The relay board CK is provided on the back surface of the back plate C4 so that it is arranged in front of the back wall 213 of the cabinet 61. That is, the relay board CK is arranged in the gap between the back wall 213 of the cabinet 61 and the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 5, a through hole 303 of the intermediate support plate 301 that supports the display unit 100 is arranged below the relay board CK, and a signal line of the relay board CK is inserted therethrough.

As a result, the relay board is arranged outside the screen device C, which facilitates the wiring work and eliminates the need to secure an installation space for the relay board CK in the screen device C. The degree of freedom of design in the device C is expanded.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, an operation opening C41 is formed in the back plate C4. The operation opening C41 is arranged at the lower right side and faces the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in a size that allows the intermediate gear E23 to be manually operated. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 in the standby position is manually moved after the display unit 100 is assembled in the cabinet 61, the display unit 100 is first removed from the cabinet 61. After that, by reaching into the screen device C from the operation opening C41 and rotating the intermediate gear E23 that can be seen horizontally from the operation opening C41, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. Can be moved.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen mechanism)
Inside the screen housing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms for displaying an image by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B are provided so that the irradiation target can be switched. Specifically, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as a plurality of screen mechanisms. The detailed structure of each screen mechanism D, E1, F1 will be described later.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen positional relationship)
As shown in FIG. 19, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 20, the front screen mechanism E1 is rotatably provided between the front exposed position and the front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set so that the front exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and exists in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposed position, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image due to the irradiation light appears only in the front screen mechanism E1. It is possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image due to the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21, the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatably provided between the reel exposed position and the reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposed position and the fixed exposed position is set so that the reel exposed position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and exists in front of the fixed exposed position. As a result, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposed position, the reel screen mechanism F1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image due to the irradiation light appears only in the reel screen mechanism F1. It is possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image due to the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

The positional relationship between the front standby position and the reel standby position is set so that the front screen mechanism E1 existing in the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 existing in the reel standby position do not interfere with each other. That is, the front standby position is arranged above the fixed screen mechanism D, while the reel standby position is arranged behind the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, the rotation distance of the front screen mechanism E1 is shorter than the rotation distance of the reel screen mechanism F1.

The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are different from each other in the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 so as to minimize the overlap of the operating regions due to rotation. ing. Specifically, the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 is set above the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 in the front standby position direction. As a result, the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 is set to the minimum.

Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are rotatable on condition that at least one of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 is present in the standby position. As a result, interference between the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 during rotation is prevented.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the fixing screen mechanism D is fixed on the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 by screwing. The fixed screen mechanism D includes a front reflection unit D1, a right surface reflection unit D2, a left surface reflection unit D3, and a bottom surface reflection unit D4. The reflecting surfaces of these reflecting units D1 to D4 are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B.

The fixed screen mechanism D may have, for example, two, three, or five reflecting portions as long as it has a plurality of reflecting surfaces having different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light. Alternatively, it may be provided with a reflecting portion of a curved or arc-shaped reflecting surface in which the center point of curvature is located on the front side at continuously different angles with respect to the optical axis.

The front reflecting portion D1 has a reflecting surface arranged so as to face the player on the front side, and reflects most of the reflected light from the irradiation light device B arranged in the front upper part of the fixed screen mechanism D forward. It is set to do. The right side reflecting portion D2 and the left side reflecting portion D3 are joined to the right side portion and the left side portion of the front reflecting portion D1, and are arranged symmetrically with respect to the front reflecting portion D1. The right-side reflecting portion D2 and the left-side reflecting portion D3 are arranged so that the width between the front end portions is larger than the width in the left-right direction of the front reflecting portion D1. As a result, the right-side reflection unit D2 and the left-side reflection unit D3 make it easier for the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflection surface to be in the direction of the front reflection portion D1, so that a part of the irradiation light is frontal while displaying an image by the irradiation light. It is designed to reflect in the direction of the reflecting portion D1. Further, also for the bottom surface reflecting portion D4, the direction of reflection of the irradiation light on the reflecting surface tends to be directed toward the front reflecting portion D1, so that a part of the irradiation light is directed toward the front reflecting portion D1 while the image of the irradiation light appears. It is designed to reflect.

In the above-mentioned fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the reflecting surface is set lower than the brightness of each reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 described later. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the amount of light reflected by the irradiation light on the reflecting surface is smaller than the amount of light reflected on the reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. As a result, the fixed screen mechanism D prevents blurring due to mixing of light due to diffused reflection of the reflecting portions D1 to D4. In the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 may be lower than the brightness of the front reflecting portion D1. In this case, since the reflection of the irradiation light by the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 to the front reflecting portion D1 can be reduced, it is possible to reduce the white blur while making the image strongly appear in the front reflecting portion D1.

As the brightness, Brightness in the L * a * b * color system (L * a * b * color space) and the L * u * v * color system (L * u * v * color space) is adopted. However, any color can be defined as long as white can be used as a reference and other colors can be represented by relative values.

The brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the brightness of the reflective surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are such that the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D is the reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. It is not particularly limited as long as it is lower than the brightness of the surface. For example, the brightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value about 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) lower than the brightness of the reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

In order to make the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than the brightness of the reflective surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is changed to the front screen. The color may be blacker than the color of the paint applied to the base material of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. For example, a white paint is used as the paint to be applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the paint to be applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. A paint to which a black pigment is added to the paint to be applied to the base material may be used.

In such a paint, the brightness of the reflective surface of the screen mechanism can be changed by changing the ratio of the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 contains only the white pigment among the white pigment and the black pigment, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D includes Both white and black pigments may be included. Further, the ratio of the black pigment to the white pigment is (for example, 5 to 25% (or, for example)) in the paint applied to the fixed screen mechanism D than in the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. It may be increased by about 10 to 20%). As the paint to be applied to the base material of these screen mechanisms, conventionally known screen paints can be appropriately adopted, and can be adjusted according to the screen type (for example, diffusion type or reflection type). ..

The paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D does not contain the black pigment, but the black pigment is dispersed in the resin that is the material of the base material before molding the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D. By doing so, the base material itself may be colored and the brightness of the base material itself may be lowered.

Further, from the viewpoint of preventing diffused reflection of light, the members constituting the screen housing C10 such as the peripheral walls (bottom plate C1, right side plate C2, left side plate C3, and back plate C4) and the inside of the screen housing C10. It is also desirable to reduce the brightness of other members (members other than the screen) arranged in. It is desirable that the brightness of these members is lower than the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, if the brightness is low, it is not necessary to consider that the image is projected as a screen on the surrounding wall. The lower the better. That is, the closer the color of the surrounding wall is to black, the more desirable it is.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 22, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface and a front screen support base E12 having a pattern such as a first pattern surface E12a on both sides. Have. The front screen member E11 is formed by applying a screen paint to a thin plate-shaped flat panel. As a result, the front screen member E11 has the projection surface E11a formed flat so that an image without distortion appears when irradiated with the irradiation light.

On the other hand, the front screen support base E12 has a holding recess E121 for holding the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to that of the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. Further, the holding recess E121 is set in two stages of depth, a deep portion and a shallow portion. The shallow portion is realized by a step portion E121a formed on the peripheral edge portion of the front screen support base E12 and a step portion E121b formed linearly to both ends in the lateral direction passing through the central portion.

As a result, the front screen member E11 housed in the holding recess E121 is brought into contact with and supported by the stepped portion E121a of the peripheral edge portion and the linear stepped portion E121b passing through the central portion, and is separated from the remaining deep portion. It is in a state. As a result, it is prevented that the deformation of the front screen support base E12 in the deep portion deforms the front screen member E11 and causes distortion in the projection surface E11a.

Further, the front screen support base E12 has a first pattern surface E12a in a part of a region around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is made visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front exposed position. Further, the front screen support base E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is made visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front standby position. In these first pattern surface E12a and second pattern surface E12b, for example, a pattern related to the production of a game is three-dimensionally formed by unevenness.

The front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 configured as described above are integrally formed by being formed separately and then bonded with an adhesive. As a result, even if a sink mark may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when the front screen mechanism E1 forms a pattern or the like on the front screen support base E12, the sink mark is mechanically separated from the front screen member E11. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the front screen member E11 from being distorted due to the sinking of the projection surface E11a.

The method of fixing the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 is not limited to the bonding with an adhesive, and any method such as screw fastening can be adopted.

The flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are each manufactured by injection molding. As the material of the flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, ABS resin or the like) that may cause sink marks when injection molding is performed may be appropriately adopted. it can.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is rotatable by the driving force of the front screen drive mechanism E2. As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the front screen drive mechanism E2 has a left front screen drive mechanism E2A connected to the lower surface of the left end portion of the front screen mechanism E1 and a right connected to the lower surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. It has a front screen drive mechanism E2B.

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B includes a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. The upper end (one end) of the crank member E22 in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is connected to the lower surface of the right end of the front screen mechanism E1. As shown in FIG. 25, the crank member E22 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 of FIG. 15 at the intermediate position E22a. As a result, the crank member E22 makes the upper end portion and the lower end portion (the other end portion) rotatable around the intermediate position E22a as the center of rotation.

The crank member E22 has an upper region on the upper end side from the intermediate position E22a and a lower region on the lower end side from the intermediate position E22a. When the crank member E22 is viewed from the side as shown in FIG. 25, the center line in the upper region (the straight line passing between the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint on the upper end side of the crank member E22) is in the vertical direction in the standby posture. Is set to. On the other hand, the center line in the lower region (a straight line passing through the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint at the lower end side of the crank member E22) is set so that the lower side inclines toward the front side rather than the upper side in the standby posture.

A slide groove E22b is formed in the lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove E22b is formed so that the groove wall surface E22b1 has a U-shape in a side view. The U-shape is composed of two straight portions and a curved portion connecting the ends of the two straight portions. The two straight portions are formed in parallel, and the slide groove E22b has a surface corresponding to the straight portion of the groove wall surface E22b1 set parallel to the center line of the lower region. A slide member E26 is movably engaged with the slide groove E22b. The groove width of the slide groove E22b (distance between the two straight portions) is substantially the same as the member width of the slide member E26, and is set to slide during movement. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the groove wall surface E22b1 of the slide groove E22b. Further, the upper end portion of the slide groove E22b is set so that the slide member E26 comes into contact with the upper end surface (the surface corresponding to the curved portion) when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture. On the other hand, the lower end of the slide groove E22b is open so that a part of the slide member E26 can be exposed.

The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 in FIG. 24. In the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, the line segment connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b is the intermediate position E22a and the slide member in the crank member E22. It is set to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point of E26.

As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, even if a force acts in the direction of rotating the lower region of the crank member E22, the rotation center position is in the direction of applying all the components of this force. Since E21a exists and acts as a fixed end, the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure is formed by a three-node link with 0 degrees of freedom, with the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 as fixed ends and the slide member E26 as the free end. Even when the mechanism E1 is pushed by hand, the front screen mechanism E1 does not move because the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as a strong brake.

An intermediate gear E23 is meshed with the crank gear E21. A motor shaft gear E24 is meshed with the intermediate gear E23. The drive shaft of the drive motor E25 is connected to the motor shaft gear E24. As a result, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B can transmit the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

Here, all the components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 coincide with the tangential direction of the turning locus of the slide member E26. Further, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 28, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, the line segment connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b is the intermediate position E22a in the crank member E22. Since it is set to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point of the slide member E26, the tangential direction of the turning locus is parallel to the groove wall surface of the slide groove E22b of the crank member E22. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, when a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, there is a groove wall surface that becomes a reaction force in the moving direction (tangential direction) of the slide member E26. Therefore, the crank gear E21 easily starts rotating.

When a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position E21b is made movable along the slide groove E22b by sliding with the slide groove E22b, so that the crank member E22 A two-node link with one degree of freedom is formed in which the intermediate position E22a and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends, and the slide member E26 is a free end that can be moved along the groove wall surface. Then, when the slide member E26 rotates, the crank member E22 provided with the slide groove E22b with which the slide member E26 is engaged rotates with the intermediate position E22a as a fulcrum, and the upper region of the crank member E22 is rotated. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposed position.

Further, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 is 0 in the stopped state when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, and gradually increases to an intermediate posture between the standby posture and the exposed posture (FIG. 27). After reaching the maximum speed in, the vehicle gradually decelerates, and when the exposed posture and the standby posture are reached, the stopped state becomes 0. As a result, the rotation of the crank gear E21 can be started and stopped in a state where the angular acceleration is small (moment of inertia), so that the torque required for the crank gear E21 can be reduced, and as a result, the drive mechanism ( It is possible to reduce failure and wear due to overload of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25).

As shown in FIG. 15, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are arranged symmetrically. The crank gear E21 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the crank gear E21 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via a shaft member E3, so that the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 is evenly applied. There is.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the reel screen mechanism F1 includes a reel screen portion F11 made of a curved flat plate, a left reel screen support portion F12 connected to the left end of the reel screen portion F11, and a reel screen portion F11. It has a right reel screen support portion F13 connected to the right end of the screen.

The reel screen portion F11 is curved in a shape similar to the rotation direction, and a pattern is formed on the back surface on the rotation center side. The pattern on the back surface is visible to the player in front when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel standby position. Further, the surface of the reel screen portion F11 has a pattern formed on the peripheral edge portion, and the inner peripheral region of the peripheral edge portion is a projection surface. When the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel exposure position, the projection surface can appear as an image by irradiating the irradiation light.

One ends of the left and right reel screen support portions F12 and F13 are connected to the reel screen portion F11. On the other hand, the other ends of the reel screen support portions F12 and F13 each have a protruding portion (not shown). The protruding portion is projected horizontally to the outside of the reel screen support portions F12 and F13, and is connected to the reel screen drive mechanism F2 to serve as the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Directing by the screen device)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various effects are executed by using the display unit 100 described above. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, by switching a plurality of screen mechanisms for displaying an image by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B, an effect using a flat image display and a sense of depth (three-dimensional effect) are obtained. It is possible to perform an effect using a certain image display and an effect using a curved image display.

For example, when the screen mechanism that causes an image to appear by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the front screen mechanism E1, the image is made to appear on the flat projection surface E11a, which causes distortion during irradiation of the irradiation light. It is possible to make an image without a light appear, and it is possible to perform an effect using this flat image.

Further, for example, when the screen mechanism that causes an image to appear by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the fixed screen mechanism D, a sense of depth (three-dimensional effect) is obtained by the plurality of reflecting portions of the fixed screen mechanism D. It is possible to make an image with a certain appearance appear, and it is possible to perform an effect using this image with a sense of depth.

Further, for example, when the screen mechanism that causes an image to appear by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the reel screen mechanism F1, the image is caused to appear on the reel screen portion F11 made of a curved flat plate. A curved image can be made to appear, and an effect using the curved image can be executed.

[Display example of the first sub display device]
Subsequently, the display screen displayed on the first sub-display device 201 will be described. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a part of the display screen displayed on the first sub-display device 201. As shown in FIG. 29, the first sub-display device 201 displays a plurality of display screens including a top screen 211, a menu screen 212, and a game information screens 213, 214, 215. These plurality of display screens can be switched according to the operation of the player received via the touch sensor 201a.

The top screen 211 is an initial screen of the display screens displayed on the first sub display device 201, and displays the menu button 211a and the outline game history 211b. The menu button 211a is an operation button that calls the menu screen 212 when operated (tapped) by the player. The summary game history 211b displays a part of the game history (summary game history) of the game history of the pachislot machine 1. In the present embodiment, for example, the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, and the number of games (number of games) in the pachislot machine 1 are displayed as the outline game history.

The menu screen 212 is a menu of the display screen displayed on the first sub-display device 201, and includes a back button 212a, a registration button 212b, an explanation button 212c, an array payout button 212d, a reach button 212e, and a WEB. The site button 212f and the volume button 212g are displayed. The back button 212a is an operation button that calls the top screen 211 by being operated by the player. Further, the registration button 212b to the volume button 212g are operation buttons for calling the corresponding display screen by being operated by the player.

For example, when the registration button 212b is operated by a player, a registration screen (not shown) for registering the player in the game is called. In recent pachislot machines, a service is widely provided in which a player is registered for each model and various information such as the achievement status of a predetermined mission is managed from the past game history of the player. .. The registration screen called by the registration button 212b is a display screen for registering a player when receiving the provision of this service.

Further, when the explanation button 212c is operated by the player, the explanation screen (not shown) of the pachislot machine 1 is called. The contents to be explained on the explanation screen include, for example, an explanation about the specifications of the pachi-slot machine 1 such as a bonus winning probability and an ART winning probability for each set value, and an introduction of characters appearing in the production of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, when the array payout button 212d is operated by the player, the array payout screen (not shown) of the pachislot machine 1 is called. On the array payout screen, for example, the correspondence between the combination of symbols determined to be a prize in the pachislot machine 1 and the privilege when the prize is determined (dividend table), and the symbols drawn on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Rows (reel arrangement) etc. are displayed.

Further, when the reach-eye button 212e is operated by the player, the reach-eye screen (not shown) of the pachi-slot machine 1 is called. On the reach eye screen, the reach eye of the pachislot machine 1 is displayed. The reach eyes are a combination of symbols to which a special privilege is given by being displayed along the effective line. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reach eyes of the reach eyes shown in FIGS. 35 and 36 The combination of symbols is applicable. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the combination of the symbols of the reach eye lip is displayed along the effective line, the player is subsequently in an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state, a normal ART or CT (FIG. 33). See))) is to be confirmed.

Further, when the WEB site button 212f is operated by the player, the WEB introduction screen (not shown) of the pachislot machine 1 is called. On the WEB introduction screen, a two-dimensional code (for example, QR code (registered trademark)) indicating the URL of an arbitrary WEB site such as a special WEB site provided for each model of the pachislot machine 1 or a WEB site of the manufacturer of the pachislot machine 1). Is displayed. The player can access the corresponding WEB site by reading the two-dimensional code displayed on the WEB introduction screen with a mobile phone or the like.

Further, when the volume button 212g is operated by the player, a volume adjustment screen (not shown) for adjusting the volume of the sound output from the speakers 9L and 9R is called. The player can adjust the volume of the effect sound of the pachi-slot machine 1 via the volume adjustment screen.

Here, since the first sub-display device 201 is provided separately from the display unit 100 that performs the effect, it can be controlled separately from the display unit 100, and the effect is executed during the game (that is, the display unit 100 performs the effect). Even in (middle), the display of the first sub-display device 201 can be switched. For the player, for example, he / she may want to know the characters appearing in the production in the display unit 100. In such a case, the explanation button 212c is operated to call the explanation screen to check the relationship between the characters. It can be grasped during the game. In addition, from the player's point of view, when the so-called rare role is won, it may be desired to grasp the symbol that should be used as a guide in order to win the rare role during the reel rotation. In such a case, the array payout button 212d The reel arrangement can be grasped by calling the arrangement payout screen by operating.

The game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are display screens for displaying detailed game history including an outline game history to be displayed on the top screen of the game history of the pachislot machine 1. The game information screen 213 displays a back button 213a, a menu button 213b, a front button 213c, a next button 213d, and a game history 213e. The back button 213a and the menu button 213b are operation buttons that call the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively, by being operated by the player. Further, the front button 213c and the next button 213d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen by being operated by the player, and when the front button 213c is operated, the game information screen is displayed from the game information screen 213. When the display screen is switched to 215 and the next button 213d is operated, the display screen is switched from the game information screen 213 to the game information screen 214. In addition, the game history 213e displays the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, and the number of games (number of games) in the pachislot machine 1.

The game information screen 214 displays a back button 214a, a menu button 214b, a front button 214c, a next button 214d, and a game history 214e. The back button 214a and the menu button 214b are operation buttons that call the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively, by being operated by the player. Further, the front button 214c and the next button 214d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen in a predetermined order by being operated by the player. In addition, the game history 214e displays the number of CZ (chance zone) rushes and the number of successes in the pachislot machine 1. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, since CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3 are provided as CZs, the number of rushes and the number of successes of CZ1 to 3 are displayed in the game history 214e.

The game information screen 215 displays a back button 215a, a menu button 215b, a front button 215c, a next button 215d, and a game history 215e. The back button 215a and the menu button 215b are operation buttons that call the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively, by being operated by the player. Further, the front button 215c and the next button 215d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen in a predetermined order by being operated by the player. In addition, the game history 215e displays the number of wins and the probability of winning a so-called small winning combination in the pachislot machine 1 (a fraction of which the numerator is 1).

The display screen displayed on the first sub-display device 201 may be switched based on a tap operation on the operation buttons displayed on each display screen, or may be switched based on a swipe operation on the display screen. May be.

[Circuit configuration of pachislot machines]
This concludes the description of the structure of the pachislot machine 1. Next, the configuration of the circuit included in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. The pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment includes a main control board 71, a sub control board 72, an external centralized terminal board 73 electrically connected to these, and a peripheral device (actuator).

<Main control board>
FIG. 30 shows an electrical configuration mainly composed of a main control board 71 of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

(Microcomputer)
The main control board 71 has a microcomputer 30 installed on the circuit board as a main component. The microcomputer 30 is composed of a CPU (hereinafter, main CPU) 31, a ROM (hereinafter, main ROM) 32, and a RAM (hereinafter, main RAM) 33.

The main ROM 32 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 31, a data table such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control board 72, and the like. The main RAM 33 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program.

(Random number generator, etc.)
A clock pulse generation circuit 34, a frequency divider 35, a random number generator 36, and a sampling circuit 37 are connected to the main CPU 31. The clock pulse generation circuit 34 and the frequency divider 35 generate a clock pulse.

The main CPU 31 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 36 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 37 extracts at least one value from the generated random numbers according to the intended use.

(Peripherals and circuits)
Peripheral devices whose operation is controlled by the microcomputer 30 include stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R and a medal payout device (hereinafter referred to as a hopper) 40. Further, the input / output ports of the microcomputer 30 include a motor drive circuit 39 and a hopper drive circuit 41 for controlling the operation of each peripheral device, a reel position detection circuit 50, a payout completion signal circuit 51, an external centralized terminal board 73, and the like. Various circuits such as the door relay board 74 and various boards are connected.

The motor drive circuit 39 constitutes a symbol changing means and controls the drive of the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. That is, the motor drive circuit 39 changes the symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R based on the establishment of the predetermined start conditions.

The reel position detection circuit 50 detects a reel index indicating that the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have made one rotation by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit according to each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. Here, the reel index is information indicating that the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have made one rotation.

The stepping motors 49L, 49C, and 49R have a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of pulse outputs and the rotation axis can be stopped at a specified angle. The driving force of the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R is transmitted to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R via gears having a predetermined reduction ratio. Each time a pulse is output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R rotate at a constant angle.

The main CPU 31 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 31 manages the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reels have rotated).

Next, the management of the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 33. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses required for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 33 is added one by one. The symbol counter is provided according to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection circuit 50.

That is, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 31 manages the symbol counter to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the positions of the symbols of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

The hopper drive circuit 41 controls the operation of the hopper 40. Further, the payout completion signal circuit 51 manages the detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 40S provided in the hopper 40, and checks whether or not the number of medals paid out from the hopper 40 has reached the number of medals to be paid out. ..

(External centralized terminal board)
The external centralized terminal board 73 is input with signals such as the number of medals inserted / paid out from the main control board 71, the number of games played, and information on whether or not the bonus is activated, and displays the signals such as the number of games played and the number of bonus operations. Output to an external display or the host computer of the amusement park. The external display is installed above, for example, the pachislot machine 1, updates the display in conjunction with the progress of the number of games and the bonus operation, and notifies the bonus operation by a lamp or the like.

Here, the medal insertion signal is a signal that enables recognition of medal insertion, and is output when the start lever 6 is operated. The medal payout signal is a signal that makes it possible to recognize the medal payout or the replay, and is output at the time of the medal payout (including credit storage) or at the time of the replay operation.

(Door relay board)
The door relay board 74 is a board that relays wiring between the main control board 71 and various buttons, switches, and information display 14. Further, the door relay board 74 is connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 75. The door relay board 74 is connected so that information can be transmitted only to the sub-relay board 75, and the information is not transmitted from the sub-relay board 75. As a result, information can be transmitted between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 only from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72 in one-way communication.

A start switch 6S, a stop switch 7S, a medal sensor 42S, a MAX bet switch 11S, a 1-bet switch (not shown), and a settlement switch 13S are connected to the door relay board 74.

The start switch 6S constitutes a start operation detecting means, and detects that the start lever 6 has been operated by the player (start operation). Further, the stop switch 7S constitutes a stop operation detecting means, and detects that each of the three stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R is pressed by the player (stop operation).

The medal sensor 42S detects that the medal received in the medal insertion slot 22 has passed through the selector. Further, the MAX bet switch 11S detects that the MAX bet button 11 has been pressed by the player. Further, the 1-bet switch detects that the 1-bet button has been pressed by the player. The main CPU 31 activates the effective line based on the detection results of the medal sensor 42S, the MAX bet switch 11S, and the 1-bet switch. Further, the settlement switch 13S detects that the settlement button 13 has been pressed by the player.

Further, the door relay board 74 is provided inside each of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R, and the stop button internal LEDs 107L, 107C, and 107R for displaying the acceptance status thereof, and the number of medals and the advantageous stop operation are unique. The information display 14 (instruction monitor) that notifies the door is connected.

<Sub-control board>
FIG. 31 shows an electrical configuration mainly composed of a sub-control board 72 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. The sub-control board 72 is electrically connected to the main control board 71, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on a command transmitted from the main control board 71.

The sub-control board 72 basically includes a CPU (hereinafter, sub-CPU) 81, a ROM cartridge board 82, a RAM (hereinafter, sub-RAM) 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, and a driver 86.

The sub CPU 81 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 82 in response to the command transmitted from the main control board 71. The ROM cartridge board 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored in the program storage area. In the control program stored in the program storage area, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control board 71, an effect random value is extracted, and the effect content (effect data) is determined. An effect registration task for registration, a drawing control task for controlling the display of an image by the display unit 100 based on the determined effect content, a lamp control task for controlling the light output by various LEDs 101, a speaker 9L, A program such as a voice control task for controlling the sound output by 9R is included.

The data storage area includes, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing production data constituting various production contents, a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation, and sound data related to BGM and sound effects. Various storage areas such as a storage area for storing the data and a storage area for storing lamp data related to the pattern of turning on and off the light are included.

The sub-RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control board 71, and the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the display unit 100, the first sub-display device 201, and the second sub-display device 202 are connected to the sub-control board 72 via a predetermined relay board. For example, in the sub-control board 72, an accessory relay board (not shown) is connected to the display unit 100, and the first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device are connected via a liquid crystal relay circuit (not shown). Connected to 202. The display unit 100, the first sub-display device 201, and the second sub-display device 202 are individually controlled under the control of the sub-control board 72.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30, a sub-relay board 75 is provided between the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72, and relays the wiring connecting the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72. Further, the sub-relay board 75 connects the sub-control board 72 and various peripheral devices by relaying wiring that connects the sub-control board 72 and a plurality of boards arranged around the sub-control board 72. .. For example, the sub-relay board 75 connects the sub-control board 72 with various LEDs 101, the reel illuminator 102, and the bet button LED 103 via an LED board (not shown). Further, the sub-relay board 75 connects the sub-control board 72 and the speakers 9L and 9R via a sound I / O board (not shown), and is a sub-control board via a touch sensor relay board (not shown). The 72 and the touch sensor 201a are connected.

[Transition flow of gaming state of pachislot machine]
Next, the gaming state controlled by the main control board 71 (main CPU 31) of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment and the transition flow thereof will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33.

<Transition flow of basic game state>
In the present embodiment, the main control board 71 manages the gaming state based on the presence / absence of winning / operating of the bonus, the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay, and the winning probability thereof. As shown in FIG. 32, the main control board 71 distinguishes between the bonus non-winning state, the inter-flag state, and the bonus state based on the presence / absence of winning / operating of the bonus (F_BB1, 2). Specifically, the bonus non-winning state is a state in which the bonus is not winning and the bonus is not operating, and the inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus is winning and the bonus is not operating, and the bonus state. Is the state in which the bonus is activated.

Whether or not the bonus is won is managed based on the data stored in the internal winning combination storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 33, and whether or not the bonus is activated is determined by the game state flag provided in the main RAM 33. It is managed based on the data stored in the storage area (not shown). Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination related to the bonus is carried over as the internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the bonus is activated. The inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination.

Further, the main control board 71 is provided with six types of states, from the RT0 gaming state to the RT5 gaming state, in which the types of internal winning combinations related to the replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other. The RT0 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, and the RT5 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability that the combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low, and the RT1 gaming state is the gaming state in which the combination related to the replay is the internal winning combination. It is a gaming state in which the probability of being determined as is a medium probability. Further, the RT3 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is high.

These RT0 gaming states to RT5 gaming states are managed based on the data stored in the gaming state flag storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 33. Specifically, the pachi-slot machine 1 has five flags from the RT1 game state flag to the RT5 game state flag, and the RT game state is managed by managing the on / off of these flags in the main RAM 33. More specifically, the main control board 71 specifies the RT game state corresponding to the ON RT game state flag as the current RT game state. When all the RT game state flags are off, the main control board 71 identifies that the current RT game state is the RT1 game state.

As shown in FIG. 32, the main control board 71 plays a game from the bonus non-winning state to the inter-flag state when (1) the winning combination (F_BB1, 2) related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination in the bonus non-winning state. Transition the state. Then, when the winning combination related to the bonus is won in (2) the inter-flag state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the bonus state.

Further, when the number of medals exceeding the specified number (216) is paid out in the (3) bonus state, the main control board 71 ends the bonus state and shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the RT1 gaming state. In this RT1 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state after (4) 20 games have elapsed, and (5) bell spills are displayed before the 20 games have elapsed. Then, the gaming state is shifted from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. Further, in the RT0 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state when (5) bell spilled eyes are displayed.

Further, when the RT3 transition lip is displayed in the RT2 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, and (7) displays the RT4 transition lip in the RT3 gaming state. Then, the gaming state is shifted from the RT3 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state. Further, when (8) a bell spill or an RT2 transition lip is displayed in the RT3 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state, and similarly, the bell in the RT4 gaming state. When a spilled eye or an RT2 transition lip is displayed, the gaming state is shifted from the RT4 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state.

Here, the bell spills are determined for each type of push order bell when the push order bells (F_3 choice bell_1st, F_3 choice bell_2nd, F_3 choice bell_3rd) described later are determined as internal winning combinations. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing. Further, in the RT2 transition lip, when the maintenance lip (F_maintenance lip_1st, F_maintenance lip_2nd, F_maintenance lip_3rd) described later is determined as the internal winning combination, the push order determined for each type of maintenance lip is not specified. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. Further, in the RT3 transition lip, when the RT3 lip (F_RT3 lip_1st, F_RT3 lip_213, F_RT3 lip_231, F_RT3 lip_3rd) described later is determined as the internal winning combination, the pressing order determined for each type of RT3 lip. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. Further, in the RT4 transition lip, when the RT4 lip (F_RT4 lip_123, F_RT4 lip_132, F_RT4 lip_2nd, F_RT4 lip_3rd) described later is determined as the internal winning combination, the pressing order determined for each type of RT4 lip. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct.

<Transition flow of game state regarding presence / absence of notification>
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 manages the game state based on the presence / absence of the bonus win / operation, the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay, and the winning probability, and notifies the player of the advantageous stop operation. The game state is managed based on whether or not to play. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence or absence of notification.

As shown in FIG. 33, the main control board 71 of the pachislot machine 1 distinguishes between the general gaming state and the ART gaming state based on the presence or absence of notification. The general gaming state is basically a gaming state (non-ART) that does not notify the content of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player, and is a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. On the contrary, the ART gaming state is a gaming state for notifying a stop operation which is advantageous for the player, and is a gaming state which is advantageous for the player. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player plays the game so as to shift from the general game state (with a bonus state depending on the situation) to the ART game state which is advantageous to the player. ..

The general gaming state is a gaming state in which ART is not won among the RT0 to RT4 gaming states. As shown in FIG. 33, the general gaming state is composed of a normal gaming state and a CZ (chance zone). The normal game state and the CZ are game states in which the game states of the transition destinations are different from each other. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game is performed by shifting from the normal game state to the CZ and from the CZ to the ART game state. Is done.

The normal gaming state is the most disadvantageous gaming state in the pachislot machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal gaming state to CZ. Specifically, the transition lottery to the CZ is performed in the normal gaming state, and (A) When the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the CZ.

The CZ is a gaming state (chance zone) with a high degree of expectation for shifting to the ART gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 33, the CZ may shift to the normal gaming state or the ART gaming state. Specifically, the CZ performs a transition lottery to ART, and (B) when the transition lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the normal gaming state, and (C) this When the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) via the preparation for ART.

Here, in the pachislot machine 1, the ART gaming state is basically the gaming state in which the ART is winning among the RT4 gaming states, and starts when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state after the ART winning. As shown in FIG. 32, since the RT4 gaming state shifts from the RT0 to RT2 gaming state via the RT3 gaming state, the ART gaming state does not start immediately even after winning the ART. Absent. Therefore, the pachi-slot machine 1 is in the process of preparing for ART until it shifts to the RT4 gaming state after winning the ART, and notifies the stop operation necessary for shifting to the RT4 gaming state during the ART preparation.

Subsequently, the ART gaming state is basically the gaming state in which the ART is winning among the RT4 gaming states. As shown in FIG. 33, the ART gaming state is usually composed of ART and CT. The normal ART and the CT are gaming states in which the playability is different from each other, and the normal ART is for displaying a stop operation advantageous to the player (for example, a combination of symbols with a large number of medals to be paid out) during a predetermined number of games. It is a gaming state that notifies the stop operation of the player and the stop operation required to maintain the RT4 game state), and the CT notifies the player of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player and adds the duration of the normal ART. It is a gaming state that functions as a chance zone. During CT, the game is usually performed without digesting the duration of ART.

As shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal ART to the CT or general gaming state. Specifically, in normal ART, a lottery for transition to CT is performed, and (D) When the lottery for transition is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from normal ART to CT. Further, the duration of the normal ART is managed. (E) When the duration ends, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal ART to the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ). Normally, the method of managing the duration of ART is arbitrary, but in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the duration is managed according to the number of games. Of course, the duration may be managed not by the number of games but by the number of medals and the difference number that are normally paid out during ART, and the number of notifications that affect the payout of medals during normal ART (navigation). The duration may be managed by the number of times).

As shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility of shifting from CT to normal ART. Specifically, the duration of the CT is managed, and (F) when the duration ends, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CT to the normal ART. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the CT is managed by the duration of 8 games per set, which will be described in detail later (see FIG. 63).

Further, as shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility that the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ) and the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) shift to the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, (2) when the winning combination related to the bonus is won in the general gaming state and the ART gaming state, the main control board 71 is in the gaming state from the general gaming state or the ART gaming state to the bonus state. To migrate.

In the bonus state, a lottery for transition to ART is performed. (G) If the transition lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ). (However, if the transition from the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) to the bonus state has occurred, the main control board 71 will move from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) even if the transition lottery is not won. ) To shift the game state). Further, (H) When the transition lottery in the bonus state is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT). As described above, when the bonus state ends, the game state shifts to the RT1 game state. Therefore, when the game state shifts from the bonus state to the ART game state, the main control board 71 is preparing for ART. The game state is transferred to the ART game state via.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 32 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 74.

<Design arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 34 represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the 20 symbol positions "0" to "19" and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

The symbol positions "0" to "19" indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol corresponding to the symbol positions "0" to "19" can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

The types of patterns are "White 7", "Blue 7", "Chile Top 1", "Chile Top 2", "Chile Bottom", "Replay", "Hat", "Cactus 1", "Cactus 2". And "Cactus 3" are included.

In the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 34, when the reel index is detected, the symbol located in the middle of the display window 4 (the symbol passing through the middle of the display window 4) is assigned to the symbol position "0", and the reel 3L Correspondence relationships are defined in which symbol positions "0" to "19" are assigned to each of the 20 symbols in the order of movement in the rotation directions of 3, 3C, and 3R.

In this way, by using the middle stage of the display window 4 as a reference, the type of the symbol located in the middle stage of the display window 4 can be specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Design code table>
Further, as shown in FIG. 34, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table and is distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) of data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 34 represents a code for identifying the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

The symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment are "white 7", "blue 7", "chili top 1", "chili top 2", "chili bottom", "replay", and "hat" as described above. , "Cactus 1", "Cactus 2" and "Cactus 3".

In the symbol code table, "00000001" is assigned as data to the "white 7" symbol (symbol code 1). "00000010" is assigned as data to the "blue 7" symbol (symbol code 2). "00000011" is assigned as data to the "Chile top 1" symbol (symbol code 3).

Similarly, for each symbol (symbol code 4-10) of "Chile top 2", "Chile bottom", "Replay", "Hat", "Cactus 1", "Cactus 2" and "Cactus 3". , "00000100" to "000001010" are assigned as data.

<Design combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 38. The symbol combination table is used when a combination of symbols predetermined according to the type of privilege, data stored in the main RAM 33 when the combination of the symbols is displayed, and the combination of the symbols are displayed. The correspondence with the benefits (number of medals paid out) is stipulated.

In the present embodiment, if the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line matches the combination of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, it is determined that the prize is won. Then, when it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given benefits such as paying out medals, operating the replay, and operating the bonus game (continuous differential device for the character). If the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line does not match any of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called "missing". That is, in the present embodiment, the combination of the "missing" symbols is specified by not specifying the combination of the symbols corresponding to the "missing" in the symbol combination table. The present invention is not limited to this, and the item of "off" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly specify "off".

The data column in the symbol combination table defines information for identifying the symbol combination displayed along the valid line. Specifically, in the data column, a "storage area" in which data of a combination of corresponding symbols is stored and "data (bits corresponding to the combination of symbols in 1-byte data)" stored in the storage area. Data for specifying) ”is specified. In the present embodiment, 22 1-byte storage areas are used to determine the combination of each symbol. For example, “C_BB1” shown in FIG. 35 is determined by storing 1 in bit 1 of the storage area 0.

The combination specified in the symbol combination table means the symbol combination of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R displayed along the effective line when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. For each combination, the role of the combination and the combination name according to the type of the symbol constituting the combination are defined.

In addition, the number of medals to be paid out specified in the symbol combination table specifies the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding combination of symbols is displayed. For example, referring to FIG. 37, when the combination name “C_9 sheets A_01” is displayed, nine medals will be paid out.

In addition, the content column in the symbol combination table indicates the role of each symbol combination and the characteristics of each symbol combination. With reference to FIG. 35, for example, the combination names “C_BB1” and “C_BB2” are a combination of symbols related to BB, and when displayed along the valid line, the gaming state shifts to the bonus state (see FIG. 32). ).

In addition, the combination names "R_RT transition A_01" to "R_RT transition B_02" are bell spills. When a bell spill is displayed along the effective line, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 32).

In addition, the combination names "C_maintenance lip A_01" to "C_maintenance lip G_01" are replays. The replay is a combination of symbols in which "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on any of the three lines of the bottom line, the top line, and the cross-down line displayed on the display window 4. When the replay is displayed along the valid line, the replay is activated.

The combination names "C_RT2 rip A_01" and "C_RT2 rip A_02" are RT2 transition rips. The RT2 transition lip is a combination of symbols in which "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on the cross-up line displayed in the display window 4. When the RT2 transition lip is displayed along the effective line, the re-game operation is performed and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 32).

The combination name "C_RT3 lip_01" is an RT3 transition lip. The RT3 transition lip is a combination of symbols in which "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on the center line (effective line) displayed on the display window 4. When the RT3 transition lip is displayed along the effective line, the re-game operation is performed and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state (see FIG. 32).

Further, the combination names "C_RT4 rip A_01" to "C_RT4 rip D_02" are RT4 transition rips. When the RT4 transition lip is displayed along the effective line, the re-game operation is performed and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 32).

In addition, the combination names "C_chililip A_01" to "C_1 certain chili lip D_01" are chili lip. The chili lip is a combination of symbols in which the chili symbol is displayed on the display window 4. Here, as shown in FIG. 34, in the present embodiment, the symbol "upper chili 1" and the symbol "lower chili" are continuously arranged on each reel. The Chilean symbol is a name when the symbol "Chile top 1" and the symbol "Chile bottom" are regarded as one symbol. When the chili lip is displayed along the effective line, the re-game is activated.

In addition, among the chili lip, the combination name "C_chili lip A_01" is a combination of symbols in which the chili symbol is displayed only on one of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4. Sometimes called "single reel lip". Further, among the chili lip, the combination names "C_chili lip B_01" and "C_chili lip C_01" are a combination of symbols whose chili symbols are displayed on two reels of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4. Yes, in the following, it may be called "double chili lip". Further, among the chili lip, the combination names "C_chili lip D_01" to "C_1 certain chili lip D_01" are a combination of symbols in which the chili symbol is displayed on all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4 (or the corresponding one). This is a combination of symbols displayed when the stop operation for displaying the combination of symbols fails (so-called a mistake in pressing a button), and may be referred to as a "triple reel" below.

Further, the combination names "C_reach eye lip A_01" to "C_reach eye lip P_02" are reach eye lip. The reach eye lip is a so-called reach eye, and is a combination of symbols in which a special combination of symbols is displayed on the display window 4L. For example, the combination name "C_reach eye lip A_01" is a combination of symbols in which "white 7-white 7-white 7" is displayed along the top line. When the reach eye lip is displayed along the effective line, the re-game is activated.

In addition, the combination names "C_RB role A_01" to "C_RB role G_02" are the ninth in the BB. When the 9th BB roll is displayed along the valid line, 9 medals are paid out. In addition, among the 9th cards in the BB, the combination of symbols excluding the combination names "C_RB role C_01" and "C_RB role C_02" is 7 symbols (designs) in any of the 5 lines displayed on the display window 4. It is a combination of symbols in which three "white 7" or symbols "blue 7") are displayed side by side (or a combination of symbols displayed when the stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols fails). In the following, it may be referred to as "7 sets in BB". On the other hand, the combination names "C_RB role C_01" and "C_RB role C_02" are a combination of symbols in which two 7 symbols are displayed side by side on any of the five lines, and are referred to as "7 in BB" below. I may call it.

Further, the combination names "C_9 sheets A_01" to "C_9 sheets H_04" are bells. The bell is a combination of symbols in which "hat-hat-hat" is displayed on any of the five lines displayed on the display window 4. When the bell is displayed along the valid line, 9 medals will be paid out.

In addition, the combination names "C_1st_A_01" to "C_2nd_B_04" are the first cards. When the first medal is displayed along the valid line, one medal is paid out. In addition, the combination names "C_SP1_01" and "C_SP2_01" are definite rolls. When a confirmed roll is displayed along the valid line, one medal is paid out.

Further, the combination names "C_3 sheets A_01" to "C_3 sheets F_01" are cacti. When the cactus is displayed along the valid line, three medals are paid out. Further, the combination names "C_weak 2 sheets A_01" to "C_weak 2 sheets B_03" are weak cherries, and the combination names "C_strong 2 sheets A_01" to "C_strong 2 sheets C_09" are strong cherries. When a weak cherry or a strong cherry is displayed along the valid line, two medals are paid out.

<Internal lottery table>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40, the internal lottery table referred to when determining the internal winning combination will be described. The internal lottery table is provided for each game state, and defines the lottery value information corresponding to each combination. FIG. 39 is an internal lottery table referred to in each of the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state, and FIG. 40 is an internal lottery table referenced in the RT5 gaming state or the bonus state.

In the present embodiment, the lottery random value extracted from the predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value corresponding to each combination, and whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative ( An internal lottery is performed by determining (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred).

Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the winning combination to which this is assigned is determined as the internal winning combination. That is, the winning probability of each number can be expressed by "the lottery value corresponding to each number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (65536)".

In the internal lottery table, basically, the type of the winning combination and the winning probability related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination change according to the type of the RT gaming state. Comparing the internal lottery tables of the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state shown in FIG. 39, it can be seen that the types of combinations and the winning probabilities related to the replay determined as the internal winning combinations in each gaming state are different. As the most characteristic point, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, "F_chili lip (No. 25)" to "F_reach eye lip D (No. 31)" are internally won in the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. It is not determined as a combination, but is determined as an internal winning combination only in the RT4 gaming state. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when "F_chili lip (No. 25)" to "F_reach eye lip D (No. 31)" are determined as internal winning combinations during the RT4 game state, specific control (described later). Flag conversion) is performed, but this specific control will be described later.

Even in the RT0 game state to the RT3 game state, "F_reach eye lip A to D" may be determined as an internal winning combination together with "F_BB1, 2" (No. 3 to 6, No.). (Refer to .15-18), "F_reach eye lip A to D" is not determined alone as an internal winning combination. Therefore, when "F_reach eye lip A to D" is determined as an internal winning combination during the RT0 game state to the RT3 game state (from the player's point of view, the combination of symbols according to the "F_reach eye lip A to D" is (When displayed), the winning combination (F_BB1, 2) related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination at the same time.

Further, in the RT5 game state, which is a state between flags, the combination related to the bonus is carried over as an internal winning combination as described above. Therefore, in the internal lottery table in the RT5 game state shown in FIG. 40, the winning combination related to the carried-over bonus is always determined as the internal winning combination.

<Comparison table of internal winning combination and symbol combination>
FIGS. 41 to 46 are comparison tables showing the correspondence with the combination of symbols that can be displayed on the effective line in each internal winning combination when each combination is determined as the internal winning combination. The circles in each correspondence table indicate the combinations of symbols that can be displayed on the effective line in the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination.

In the pachislot machine 1, the main control board 71 has different stop controls depending on the internal winning combination and the gaming state, and when a predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence relationship shown in FIGS. 42 to 48 is shown. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped so that the combination of symbols can be displayed. In the correspondence table shown in FIGS. 42 to 48, all combinations of symbols that may be displayed when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination are listed, but the circles corresponding to the winning combinations are listed. Even a combination of symbols marked with may not be displayed.

That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the stop control (for example, the symbol to be preferentially pulled in) is made different according to the combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed and the current gaming state. Even a combination of marked symbols may not be displayed. Therefore, FIGS. 47 and 48 show the correspondence between the type of combination and the combination of the symbols that are actually stopped and displayed.

<Correspondence between the winning combination during the non-flag and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped>
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship (some combinations are omitted) between the winning combination in the gaming state excluding the inter-flag state and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped. In the pachi-slot machine 1, as a plurality of combinations, a "push order combination" is provided, which is a combination in which the combinations of symbols displayed according to the order of stop operations (push order) are different. The combination of symbols associated with the "correct answer in the push order" in FIG. 47 is a combination of symbols that is advantageous for the player among the combinations of symbols displayed according to the push order, and corresponds to the "incorrect answer in the push order". The attached symbol combination is a combination of symbols that is disadvantageous to the player among the combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order. When notifying the stop operation which is advantageous for the player, the correct push order is notified, and as a result, the combination of symbols associated with the "push order correct answer" is displayed. Even in the ART game state, the push order that is an incorrect answer may be notified, but the details will be described later.

Here, in the present embodiment, the end of the name of the push order combination indicates the push order that is the correct answer. Specifically, the trailing "1st" of the winning combination means that the correct push order is for the first stop operation on the left reel 3L, and the trailing "2nd" of the winning combination is The correct push order means that the first stop operation is for the reel 3C in the middle, and the last "3rd" in the name of the combination means that the correct push order is the reel whose first stop operation is on the right. It means that it is for 3R. Further, the end "123" of the role name means that the correct push order is "left, middle, right", and the end "132" of the role name means that the correct push order is "left". , Right, middle ", and the ending" 213 "of the role name means that the correct push order is" middle, left, right ", and the ending" 231 "of the role name. Means that the correct push order is "left, right, middle".

As shown in FIG. 47, the combination “F_chili lip” is a combination in which the combinations of symbols displayed are different depending on the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, FIG. 41 of the chili lip (see FIG. 35). If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 46 is displayed along the valid line and the pressing order is not correct, the replays (see FIG. 35) are shown in FIGS. 41 to 46. One of the displayable symbol combinations shown is displayed along the valid line. In addition, referring to FIGS. 41 to 46, the combination "F_chili lip" cannot display the triple chili lip ("C_ chili lip D_01" to "C_1 certain chili lip D_01"), and the single chili lip or the double chili lip ("C_ chili lip"). It can be seen that only A_01, "C_Chillilip B_01", and "C_Chillilip C_01") can be displayed. That is, the role "F_chili lip" is a role in which the triple chili lip cannot be displayed.

In addition, the combinations "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and if the pressing order is correct, the chili lip (see FIG. 35) If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 is displayed along the valid line and the pressing order is not correct, FIGS. 41 to 41 of the replay (see FIG. 35) are shown. Any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in 46 is displayed along the valid line. In addition, referring to FIGS. 41 to 46, it can be seen that the combinations “F_certain chili lip” and “F_1 certain chili lip” can display triple chili lip. That is, the combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are roles that can display triple chili lip.

In addition, the combinations "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the reach eye lip (reach eye lip () If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of (see FIGS. 35 and 36) is displayed along the valid line and the pressing order is not correct, a replay (FIG. 35) is performed. 35), any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 is displayed along the effective line.

In addition, the order of pressing the correct answers in the roles "F_chili lip", "F_certain chili lip", "F_1 certain chili lip" and the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" may be arbitrary, but this implementation In the embodiment, the push order in which the first stop operation is for the left reel 3L is set as the correct push order. Therefore, for example, in a game in which the combination "F_reach eye lip A" is determined as the internal winning combination, when the player performs the first stop operation on the left reel 3L, the reach eye lip is displayed. Will be done.

Further, for the combination "F_maintenance lip A" and "F_maintenance lip B", any combination of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the replays (see FIG. 35) is an effective line regardless of the pressing order. It is displayed along with. In addition, the combinations "F_maintenance rip_1st" to "F_maintenance rip_3rd" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and if the pressing order is correct, replay (see FIG. 35). If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 is displayed along the valid line and the pressing order is not correct, the RT2 transition lip (see FIG. 35) Any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 is displayed along the effective line.

Further, the combinations "F_RT3 rip_1st" to "F_RT3 rip_3rd" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the RT3 transition rip (see FIG. 35). Is displayed along the valid line, and if the pressing order is not correct, one of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 in the replay (see FIG. 35) is displayed on the valid line. Displayed along.

Further, the combinations "F_RT4 rip_123" to "F_RT4 rip_3rd" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the RT4 transition rip (see FIG. 35). Is displayed along the valid line, and if the pressing order is not correct, one of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 in the replay (see FIG. 35) is displayed on the valid line. Displayed along.

Further, the combinations "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd" are combinations in which the combinations of symbols displayed are different according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the bell (see FIG. 37). Is displayed along the valid line, and if the pressing order is not correct, a bell spill (see FIG. 35) or a first roll (see FIGS. 37 and 38) is displayed.

Further, in the combination "F_common bell", any combination of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the bells (see FIG. 37) is displayed along the effective line regardless of the pressing order. Further, for the combinations "F_sabo 1" and "F_sabo 2", any combination of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the cacti (see FIG. 38) is along the effective line regardless of the pressing order. Is displayed.

Further, for the combination "weak chili", any combination of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the weak cherries (see FIG. 38) is displayed along the effective line regardless of the pressing order. Further, for the roles "F_strong chili 1" and "F_strong chili 2", any combination of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the strong cherries (see FIG. 38) is effective regardless of the pressing order. Displayed along the line.

<Correspondence between the winning combination between the flags and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped>
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination in the inter-flag state and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped (some combinations are omitted), and in particular, BB (“C_BB1”) during the inter-flag state. "C_BB2") can be displayed. In "whether or not BB is established" in FIG. 48, "○" indicates that BB can be displayed, and "x" indicates that BB cannot be displayed.

If the BB cannot be displayed, a combination of symbols corresponding to a combination other than the combination related to the bonus determined as the internal winning combination will be displayed. The combination of symbols displayed according to the combination other than the combination related to this bonus is as shown in FIG. 47. For example, in the combination "F_BB1 + F_chililip", the BB cannot be displayed, and the combination of the corresponding symbols shown in the combination "F_chililip" in FIG. 47 is displayed. In this case, during the inter-flag state, only the combination of symbols displayed when the push order is correct may be displayed, or only the combination of symbols displayed when the push order is incorrect may be displayed. It may be.

For example, since the BB cannot be displayed in the combination "F_BB1 + F_3 selection bell_1st", the combination of the corresponding symbols shown in the combination "F_3 selection bell_1st" in FIG. 47 is displayed. It is possible to display only the bell displayed when the push order is correct, and to make it impossible to display the bell spilled stitch or the first roll displayed when the push order is incorrect. Further, in the case of the combination "F_BB1 + F_RT3 rip_1st", only the replay displayed when the push order is incorrect may be displayed, and the RT3 transition rip displayed when the push order is correct may not be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 48, in the inter-flag state, when the combination related to the bonus and any of "missing", "F_special 1", "F_special 2", and "F_special 3" are determined as the internal winning combination, BB can be displayed.

<Abbreviation for the winning role>
The correspondence between the winning combination and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped has been described above. Next, a data table used when performing various lottery in a general game state, an ART game state, etc. will be described. In the following, the winning combination used when referring to the data table is represented by an abbreviation, so that the data table is used. Before the explanation of, the abbreviation of the winning role will be explained. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an abbreviation for the winning combination.

As shown in FIG. 49 (A), in the following, the combinations "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" are referred to as the combination "BB", and the combinations "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd" are referred to as the combination "push order bell". The role "F_common bell" is called the role "common bell", the roles "F_sabo 1" and "F_sabo 2" are called the role "cactus", the role "F_weak chili" is called the role "weak cherry", and the role "F_strong" "Chile 1" and "F_strong Chile 2" are called the role "strong cherry".

In addition, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are called "triple chili lip" when they win the flag conversion lottery, and are called "replay" when they do not win the flag conversion lottery. Similarly, the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are called the role "reach eye lip" when they win the flag conversion lottery, and are called "replay" when they do not win the flag conversion lottery.

(Flag conversion lottery)
Here, the flag conversion lottery will be described with reference to FIG. 49 (B). In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, any one of the roles "F_certain chili lip", "F_1 certain chili lip", "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" alone serves as an internal winning role during the RT4 game state. Once determined, a flag conversion lottery is performed. Then, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege (for example, addition of the number of ART games or CT winning) is given.

As shown in FIG. 47, for the combinations "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip", the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" is displayed when the push order is correct, and the combination of the symbols of "replay" is displayed when the push order is incorrect. Is displayed. In the pachislot machine 1, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are treated as the role "triple chili lip", and information for displaying the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip". (For example, push forward to aim at the Chilean pattern). On the other hand, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are treated as the role "replay", and information for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay" is notified (for example). , Notifies the push order other than forward push).

Similarly, for the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D", the combination of the symbols of "reach eye lip" is displayed when the push order is correct, and the combination of the symbols of "replay" is displayed when the push order is incorrect. Is displayed. In the pachislot machine 1, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are treated as the role "reach eye lip", and the combination of the symbols of "reach eye lip" is treated. Notify the information to be displayed (for example, push forward to aim at the symbol "white 7"). On the other hand, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are treated as the role "replay", and the information for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay". Is notified.

By performing the stop operation in accordance with this notification, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" or "reach eye lip" is displayed, and a special privilege is given. From the pachislot machine 1, special benefits are given according to the winning of the flag conversion lottery, but from the player's point of view, the special benefits are displayed because the combination of the "triple chili lip" symbols is displayed. You will feel that you have been granted.

In order to enhance the playability of the pachislot machine, it may be preferable that the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given is different depending on the state rather than being constant. Since the stop control (combination of displayed symbols) differs depending on the type of internal winning combination, the winning probability of the winning combination is different as a method of changing the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given depending on the state. A method is also conceivable (in the pachislot machine 1, the winning probability of the winning combination can be different depending on whether or not the bonus is activated and the RT gaming state. Therefore, for example, only the RT4 gaming state is used as the gaming state corresponding to the ART gaming state. Instead, a method of providing other gaming states such as RT6 gaming state and RT7 gaming state is also conceivable). However, since the triggers for different winning probabilities of the winning combination (triggers for shifting the RT gaming state) are limited, this method lacks flexibility.

Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the internal lottery for determining the internal winning combination, the flag conversion lottery and the notification based on the lottery result are performed without changing the winning probability of the winning combination. The appearance frequency of the combination of the given symbols can be flexibly changed according to the state. That is, in a state where it is easy to win the flag conversion lottery, the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given can be increased, and conversely, when it is difficult to win the flag conversion lottery, the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given can be increased. Can reduce the frequency of appearance.

In the following, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" will be referred to as "triple" to win the flag conversion lottery when the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination. It is sometimes referred to as converting to "chili lip" (or simply converting to "triple chili lip"), and when the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are determined as internal winning roles. Winning the flag conversion lottery is called converting the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" to "reach eye lip" (or simply converting to "reach eye lip"). There is.

[Flow of the game during the general game state]
Subsequently, the flow of the game during the general game state will be described with reference to FIG. 50. In the pachislot machine 1, the normal gaming state in the general gaming state is shifted to the CZ in the general gaming state, and then the CZ in the general gaming state is shifted to the ART gaming state, so that the general gaming state (non-ART) is changed to the ART gaming state. (See FIG. 33). FIG. 50 (A) is a diagram showing the flow of the game when shifting from the normal game state of the general game state to the CZ of the general game state.

As shown in FIG. 50A, the normal gaming state has a low probability state and a high probability state as a lottery state of CZ. The low-probability state and the high-probability state are states in which the expectation of winning the CZ lottery performed during the normal game state is different, the low-probability state is difficult to win the CZ lottery, and the high-probability state is the CZ lottery. It is in a state where it is easy to do. If the CZ lottery performed during the normal game state is won, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the CZ (see FIG. 33).

The pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of chance zones of CZ1, CZ2 and CZ3 as CZs (chance zones). These CZ1 to CZ3 are chance zones having different expectations for winning the ART lottery performed during the CZ, CZ3 is a chance zone to win the ART lottery without fail, and CZ1 and CZ2 are the ART lottery with a predetermined probability. It is a chance zone to win. In the CZ lottery performed during the normal game state, the CZ transitioning from the normal game state is drawn from these CZ1 to CZ3.

Subsequently, FIG. 50B is a diagram showing the flow of the game when shifting from the CZ1 and CZ2 in the general gaming state to the ART gaming state. CZ1 and CZ2 are composed of a first half portion and a second half portion. The first half is a period for promoting ranks having different expectations for winning the ART lottery performed during CZ, and the second half is a period for notifying the lottery result of the ART lottery based on the rank by a battle effect.

During CZ1, 6 levels of modes are used as ranks, and the higher the mode, the higher the expectation of winning the ART lottery. The first half of CZ1 continues the first number of games (for example, 12 games at the maximum), and the mode promotion lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination. Then, the ART lottery is performed based on the mode promoted in the first half of the first game of the second half of CZ1.

In addition, during CZ2, points of 10 levels are used as ranks, and the higher the points, the higher the expectation of winning the ART lottery. In the first half of CZ2, the second number of games (for example, up to 15 games) is continued, and points are promoted by lottery based on the internal winning combination. Then, the ART lottery is performed based on the points promoted in the first half of the first game of the second half of CZ2.

In the latter half of CZ1, a battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character A play against each other is performed, and in the latter half of CZ2, a battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character B play against each other is performed. This battle production continues for the third number of games (for example, up to 4 games), and the victory or defeat is managed based on the result of the ART lottery. If the ART lottery is won, the ally character wins and is not won. If so, the enemy character wins. Further, in the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2, an ART lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination in each game, and when the ART lottery is won, the result of the battle effect is rewritten. That is, when a so-called rare role is determined as an internal winning role during the battle production, an ART lottery is performed and the result of the battle production is rewritten based on the result.

In CZ1 and CZ2, if the ART is not won, the player is defeated in the battle effect in the latter half, and basically, the game state shifts to the normal game state after that. On the other hand, in CZ1 and CZ2, when the ART is won, the battle effect in the latter half is won, and then the game state shifts to the normal ART via the preparation for the ART. In the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, a freeze may occur. In this case, the game state shifts to CT (additional chance zone) instead of normal ART (via during ART preparation).

Subsequently, FIG. 50 (C) is a diagram showing the flow of the game when shifting from the CZ3 in the general game state to the ART game state. CZ3 continues the fourth number of games (for example, 17 games at the maximum), and ART lottery is performed every game based on the internal winning combination. CZ3 ends when the ART lottery is won, and from the next game, the game state shifts to CT (additional chance zone) via ART preparation. Further, in CZ3, a freeze may occur, and in this case as well, the game state shifts from the next game to CT (additional chance zone) via ART preparation. On the other hand, when the number of the fourth game elapses without winning the ART lottery in CZ3, the game state shifts to the normal ART via the preparation for ART. That is, CZ3 is a chance zone in which the transition to the ART gaming state is confirmed at the time of transition.

[Data table used during general game state]
Subsequently, the data table used during the general gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 56.

<Normal medium and high probability lottery table>
FIG. 51 is a normal medium-high probability lottery table used for the transition lottery of the CZ lottery state (low probability and high probability). In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery state of CZ is changed based on the internal winning combination, and the lottery state of CZ is also changed at the end of the bonus and the end of CZ and ART. FIG. 51 (A) is a normal medium-high probability lottery table used when shifting the lottery state of CZ based on the internal winning combination, and is referred to every game during the normal game state. Further, FIG. 51 (B) is a normal medium-high probability lottery table used when shifting the lottery state of CZ at the end of the bonus, and is referred to at the time of setting change, the end of the bonus, or the end of CZ, ART.

The normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (A) defines information on the lottery value for the CZ lottery state after the transition in association with the current CZ lottery state and the winning combination.

In the various data tables shown below, the lottery value information is conceptually shown. In the figure, "0" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "0%" is defined, and "extremely low" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "0% to less than 1%" is defined. It means that it is specified, "extremely low" means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability "1% to less than 10%" is specified, and "low" means a lottery probability "10%". It means that the lottery value corresponding to "~ 30% or less" is specified, and "medium" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "30% to less than 60%" is specified. "High" means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability "60% to less than 80%" is defined, and "extremely high" means a lottery corresponding to a lottery probability "80% to less than 99%". It means that the value is specified, "extremely high" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "99% to less than 100%" is specified, and "confirmed" means the lottery probability " It means that the lottery value corresponding to "100%" is specified.

Then, in the various data tables shown below, the data are extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (“0 to 255” when the probability denominator is 256, “0 to 65535” when the probability denominator is 65536). The random number value for lottery is sequentially subtracted by the specified lottery value, and whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred) is determined, so that the internal lottery is performed. Will be.

With reference to the normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (A), it can be seen that when the current CZ lottery state has a low probability, it is easy to shift to a high probability when the weak cherry is an internal winning combination. .. In addition, when the current CZ lottery state has a high probability, it can be seen that the high probability is maintained by determining any of the common bell, cactus, weak cherry, and strong cherry as the internal winning combination. ..

The normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (B) defines information on the lottery value for the lottery state of the CZ after the transition according to the situation at the time of reference. With reference to the normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (B), it can be seen that the lottery state of CZ always shifts to a high probability at the end of the bonus.

<CZ lottery table>
FIG. 52 is a CZ lottery table used for CZ lottery, and FIG. 52 (A) is a CZ lottery table used when performing CZ lottery based on an internal winning combination during a normal game state. B) is a CZ lottery table used when performing a CZ lottery as to whether or not to pull back the CZ when the CZ fails or when the ART ends.

The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52 (A) defines information on lottery values related to winning / non-winning of CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3 in association with the current lottery state of CZ and the internal winning combination. With reference to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52 (A), it can be seen that when the current CZ lottery state is in the high probability, the probability of winning the CZ lottery is higher than in the low probability.

The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52 (B) defines lottery value information regarding winning / non-winning of CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3. At the time of CZ failure (when the ART lottery in CZ1 and CZ2 is not won) or at the end of the ART game state, the CZ pullback lottery is performed using the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52 (B).

<CZ1 medium mode up lottery table>
FIG. 53 is a CZ1 medium mode-up lottery table used for the mode-up lottery of CZ1 in the first half of CZ1. The mode-up lottery table in CZ1 defines information on the lottery value for the result of the mode-up lottery in association with the current mode and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 55 (A) described later, in CZ1, the probability of winning the ART lottery increases as the mode increases, and when the mode increases to 6, the ART lottery is always won. The lottery result "mode 1 UP" means that the mode of CZ1 is increased by 1, and the lottery result "mode 2 UP" means that the mode of CZ1 is increased by 2. That is, if the current mode is "2" and the "mode 2 UP" is won, the mode of CZ1 will increase from "2" to "4". In addition, when the lottery result "mode 6 UP_freeze occurs" is won, a freeze occurs, and the ART lottery is won and CT is given.

<CZ2 medium point lottery table>
FIG. 54 is a CZ2 middle point lottery table used for the CZ2 point-up lottery in the first half of the CZ2. The CZ2 middle point lottery table defines the lottery value information for the result of the point-up lottery in association with the current points and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 55 (B), which will be described later, in CZ2, the higher the points, the higher the probability of winning the ART lottery, and when the points rise to 10, the ART lottery is always won. The lottery result "point 2UP" means that the points of CZ2 are increased by 2. For example, when the current point is "2" and the "point 2UP" is won, the point of CZ2 is "point 2UP". It will go up from "2" to "4". Further, when the lottery result "Point 10UP_freeze occurs" is won, a freeze occurs, and the ART lottery is won and CT is given.

<ART lottery table in CZ>
55 and 56 are CZ medium ART lottery tables used for CZ medium ART lottery, and FIG. 55 (A) is a CZ medium ART lottery table (for CZ1) used in the first game of the latter half of CZ1. FIG. 55 (B) is an ART lottery table (for CZ2) in CZ used in the first game of the latter half of CZ2, and FIG. 55 (C) is a CZ used in the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2. It is a medium ART lottery table (common to CZ1 and CZ2 for the latter half of the battle), and FIG. 55 (D) is a CZ medium ART lottery table (for CZ3) used for ART lottery in CZ3.

The ART lottery table (for CZ1) in CZ shown in FIG. 55 (A) defines the lottery value information regarding the presence or absence of winning of the ART lottery in association with the current mode. Further, the ART lottery table (for CZ2) in CZ shown in FIG. 55 (B) defines the lottery value information regarding the presence or absence of the winning of the ART lottery in association with the current points. With reference to the ART lottery table in CZ (for CZ1) and the ART lottery table in CZ (for CZ2), it can be seen that in CZ1 and CZ2, the higher the rank (mode or point) of the first half, the easier it is to win the ART lottery.

The ART lottery table in CZ (common to CZ1 and CZ2 for the latter half of the battle) shown in FIG. 55 (C) defines the lottery value information regarding the presence or absence of the winning of the ART lottery in association with the internal winning combination. With reference to the ART lottery table in CZ (common to CZ1 and CZ2 for the latter half of the battle), if a rare role (weak cherry, cactus or strong cherry) is determined as an internal winning role in the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2, it is determined. It can be seen that there is a probability of winning the ART lottery.

The ART lottery table (for CZ3) in CZ shown in FIG. 56 (D) defines information on the lottery value regarding the presence or absence of the winning of the ART lottery in association with the number of continuous games of CZ3 and the internal winning combination. If you refer to the ART lottery table in CZ (for CZ3), you can see that if you win the ART lottery in CZ3, you will always win the CT.

[Flow of games during normal ART]
Subsequently, the flow of the game during the normal ART will be described with reference to FIG. 57. The pachi-slot machine 1 usually has ART and CT as ART game states (see FIG. 33), and the CT is used as an additional chance zone. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, the game is normally performed with the aim of shifting to CT during ART. FIG. 57 (A) is a diagram showing a flow of a lottery for transition to CT during normal ART.

As shown in FIG. 57 (A), the pachislot machine 1 has an ART level and a CT lottery state as states that affect various lottery normally performed during ART. The ART level is provided in four stages of level 1 to level 4, and is mainly controlled based on the number of continuous games during normal ART. Then, the ART level affects the determination of the CT lottery state and the flag conversion lottery during the normal ART described later. In addition, the CT lottery state is provided in four stages of low probability, normal, high probability, and ultra-high probability, and is controlled mainly based on the ART level and the internal winning combination during normal ART. Then, the CT lottery state affects the CT lottery performed during the normal ART and the flag conversion lottery during the normal ART described later.

(Flag conversion during normal ART)
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the roles “F_certain chili lip”, “F_1 certain chili lip”, “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye” are used during the RT4 game state (that is, during the ART game state). When any one of "Rip D" is independently determined as an internal winning combination, a flag conversion lottery is performed, and a special privilege (for example, an addition of the number of ART games or a CT winning) is given according to the lottery result. FIG. 57 (B) is a diagram showing a flag lottery method during normal ART.

As shown in FIG. 57 (B), the pachi-slot machine 1 normally performs a flag conversion lottery by referring to the ART level and the CT lottery state during ART. As a result, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege is given, and a notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "triple chili lip" and the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip" (for example, in order). Notification to aim at a predetermined pattern by pressing) is performed. On the contrary, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay" (for example, the notification of the push order other than the forward push) is performed. When the player performs a stop operation according to this notification, a combination of symbols according to the notification content, that is, a combination of symbols of "triple chili lip" or a symbol of "reach eye lip" when the flag conversion lottery is won. The combination of symbols is displayed, and if the flag conversion lottery is not won, the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed.

[Data table normally used during ART]
Subsequently, the data table normally used during ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 62.

<Flag conversion lottery table during ART>
FIG. 58 is an ART flag conversion lottery table that is normally used for a flag conversion lottery during ART. In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the flag conversion lottery during normal ART is performed in two stages. Specifically, when the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination, the first-stage flag conversion lottery is first performed, and when the first-stage flag conversion lottery is won, After that, the second stage flag conversion lottery is performed. Then, when the second stage flag conversion lottery is won, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are converted into "triple chili lip", and the first stage flag conversion lottery or the second stage flag conversion lottery. If it is not won, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are treated as "replay" without being converted into "triple chili lip".

FIG. 58 (A) is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for the first stage flag conversion lottery, and FIG. 58 (B) is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for the second stage flag conversion lottery. is there. The flag conversion lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 58A defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the first stage flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination. In the pachislot machine 1, the first-stage flag conversion lottery is performed only for the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip", and for the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D". Only the second stage flag conversion lottery is performed.

The flag conversion lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 58B defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the second stage flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination, the ART level, and the CT lottery state. In addition, until the CT is won once in the normal ART, the "first time (until the CT is won once)" column of the item "ART level" is referred to.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 58 (A) and 58 (B), in each of the flag conversion lottery tables during ART, the random values (0 to 255) in the range of the probability denominator 256 are used in the first and second stages. Since the flag conversion lottery is performed, the two-step flag conversion lottery can be simulated as a lottery performed using random values in the range of the probability denominator 65536. In recent pachislot machines, the main side is required to perform lottery (ART lottery, etc.) related to ball ejection, which was conventionally performed on the sub side, but the capacity of the storage means (ROM) on the main side is limited. Therefore, there is a need for a mechanism that enables lottery without impairing playability while suppressing the capacity.

In this respect, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention, by performing the probability denominator 256 in two stages, the probability denominator 65536 can be drawn, so that the capacity can be suppressed. In addition, by referring to the ART level and the CT lottery state for the second stage lottery, it is possible to perform a flag conversion lottery according to the current state as well as the internal winning combination, so that various playability can be achieved. You can perform a flag conversion lottery with you.

<ART level determination table>
FIG. 59 is an ART level determination table used to determine the ART level. The determination of the ART level is performed at the time of winning the ART when the transition to the ART gaming state is decided, and during the normal ART. FIG. 59 (A) is an ART level determination table for determining the ART level at the time of winning the ART, and FIG. 59 (B) is an ART level determination table for determining the ART level during normal ART.

The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 59 (A) defines lottery value information for each ART level. If a freeze has occurred at the time of winning the ART (see FIG. 53 and the like), the ART level 2 is determined as the ART level. The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 59B defines information on the lottery value for the destination ART level in association with the current ART level and the number of continuous games during normal ART. Further, the ART level determination table shown in FIG. 59B defines information on the lottery value for the destination ART level in association with the current ART level and the number of continuous games during normal ART at the time of CT entry. .. That is, during normal ART, the ART level shifts according to the number of continuous games, and the ART level shifts even at the timing when the normal ART enters the CT.

<Normal ART medium and high probability lottery table>
FIG. 60 is a normal ART medium-high probability lottery table for drawing a CT lottery state during normal ART. Normally, the ART medium-high probability lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the CT lottery state of the migration destination in association with the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination. If you refer to the normal ART medium- and high-probability lottery table, you can see the role "Triple Chili Lip" (the role "F_Probability Chili Lip""F_1 Probability Chilip" wins the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning) "and the role" Reach Eye Lip It can be seen that in "A" to "F_reach eye lip D" (winning the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning) ", the CT lottery state is likely to shift (fall) to" low probability ". In the above description, if the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege is given. Therefore, it seems that the CT lottery state is likely to fall, which is contrary to the above explanation. As will be described later in, the roles "triple chili lip" and "reach eye lip" are always won in the CT lottery. Therefore, even if the CT lottery state falls, the special privilege of CT winning is still given.

<CT lottery table during ART>
FIG. 61 is a CT lottery table during ART, which is usually used for CT lottery during ART. The CT lottery table during ART defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the CT lottery in association with the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination. In the CT lottery table during ART, if "cactus", "weak cherry", "strong cherry", "triple chili lip", "reach eye lip", and "BB" are determined as internal winning roles, the range of probability denominator 256 CT lottery is performed using random values. On the other hand, when other combinations (for example, replay, common bell, push order bell, etc.) are determined as the internal winning combination, CT lottery is performed using random values in the range of the probability denominator 65536.

The pachislot machine 1 has "normal CT" and "high accuracy CT" as CTs. "Normal CT" and "High-accuracy CT" have different expectations for the number of ART games to be added during CT (additional chance zone), and "High-accuracy CT" has a larger number of ART games than "Normal CT". Is easy to add (see FIG. 66).

<Additional lottery table during normal ART>
FIG. 62 is a normal ART extra lottery table used for an extra lottery to add the number of ART games during the normal ART. Normally, the additional lottery table during ART defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

[Flow of games during CT]
Subsequently, the flow of the game during CT will be described with reference to FIG. 63. As shown in FIG. 63 (A), in the pachislot machine 1, CT is performed by playing eight times in one set. During CT, the number of ART games is added to the lottery based on the internal winning combination, and the number of games is not subtracted when the additional lottery is won, and the number of games is subtracted only when the additional lottery is not won. Will be done. Therefore, during CT, the game in which the number of ART games is added does not end, and the game in which the number of ART games is not added is performed eight times in the same set.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 63 (A) and 63 (B), when the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during CT (that is, when the winning combination "F_certain chili lip" or "F_1 certain chili lip" is won, the flag conversion lottery is won. ), 8 games per set are reset. For example, if a game in which the number of ART games is not added is played seven times in the same set, the CT will end if another game in which the number of ART games is not added is played, but the role "triple chili lip" If the game is won, the CT will be reset, and as a result, the CT will not end until a game in which the number of ART games is not added is performed eight times. Therefore, the CT becomes easier to continue as the role "triple chili lip" is won.

(Flag conversion during CT)
FIG. 63 (C) is a diagram showing a flag lottery method during CT. During CT, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are always converted to the role "triple chili lip". As described above, if the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during CT, the CT is reset. Therefore, when the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination, the CT is reset. It will be set.

On the other hand, for the combinations "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D", the winning probability of the flag conversion lottery is controlled based on the three-stage table (tables 0 to 2). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), Table 0 has the lowest probability of being converted to "reach-eye lip", Table 1 has the next lowest probability of being converted to "reach-eye lip", and Table 2 Is most likely to be converted to a "reach eye lip". If the role "reach eye lip" is won during CT, CT is newly assigned as shown in FIG. 67 described later.

As shown in FIG. 63 (C), in normal CT, the table is determined based on the ART level. Further, in high-probability CT, table 0 is always determined regardless of the ART level.

[Data table used during CT]
Subsequently, the data table used during CT will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67.

<Table during CT lottery table>
FIG. 64 is a CT table lottery table for determining a table to be used for the flag conversion lottery from the three-stage table. The table during CT lottery table defines the lottery value information of the table used for the flag conversion lottery in association with the state such as the ART level and the type of CT to be executed from now on. The table during CT lottery table is referred to at the start of CT when it is decided to win the CT lottery and shift to CT, and determines the table to be used for the flag conversion lottery during CT.

<Flag conversion lottery table during CT>
FIG. 65 is a CT flag conversion lottery table used for the flag conversion lottery during CT. The flag conversion lottery table during CT defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the table used for the flag conversion lottery and the internal winning combination. With reference to the CT flag conversion lottery table, it can be seen that the combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are always converted to the combination "triple chili lip" during CT.

<Additional lottery table during CT>
FIG. 66 is an additional lottery table during CT used for an additional lottery for adding the number of ART games during CT. The additional lottery table during CT defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination. It should be noted that the winning combination other than the winning combination shown in FIG. 66 is not won in the additional lottery during CT.

In addition, in the additional lottery during normal CT, the number of additional games varies depending on the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won. Specifically, when the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT is "1 to 8 times", it is easy to determine "10 games" as the number of additional games, and during the same CT. When the number of times the role "triple chili lip" is won is "9 to 16 times", it is easy to determine "20 games" as the number of additional games, and the number of times the role "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT. When is "17 to 24 times", it is easy to determine "30 games" as the number of additional games, and when the number of times the winning role "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT is "25 times or more". , "50 games" is easily determined as the number of additional games.

More specifically, in the additional lottery table during CT, when the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT is "1 to 8 times", the role "triple chili lip" in the figure is used. The number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value "extremely high" is "10 games", and the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value "extremely low" is "20 games". Then, when the number of times the role "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT becomes "9 times or more", the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value "extremely high" of the role "triple chili lip" in the figure becomes " Promoted to "20 games". Furthermore, when the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT is "17 times or more", it corresponds to the lottery values "extremely high" and "extremely low" of the role "triple chili lip" in the figure. The number of additional games is promoted to "30 games". Similarly, when the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT is "25 times or more", the lottery values "extremely high" and "extremely low" of the role "triple chili lip" in the figure are supported. The number of additional games to be played is promoted to "50 games".

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of games to be added is increased according to the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during CT. As mentioned above, as long as the number of ART games is added, the CT will not end, and if the role "triple chili lip" is won, the CT will be reset. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the CT It is possible to expect that the amount of addition per time will increase as the number of times continues, and the interest during CT will improve. In addition, since the number of times that triggers the increase in the amount of addition per time is more than the number of games (8 times) for one set of CT (9 times or more), an excessive profit is given to the player. It is possible to prevent the giving, and to balance the profits of the player and the game store.

<Lottery table with additional sets during CT>
FIG. 67 is a lottery table for adding the number of sets during CT used for the lottery for adding the number of sets that gives a new CT during CT. The lottery table for adding the number of sets during CT defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the lottery for adding the number of sets in association with the type of CT being executed and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 67, when the winning combination "reach eye lip" is won during CT, a new CT is given. When a new CT is assigned due to the lottery with the number of sets added, the new CT is started again at the timing when the CT being executed is completed.

In addition, the number of times the above-mentioned combination "triple chili lip" is won is counted only during the same CT, but this "during the same CT" is when the number of sets added during the CT is added to the lottery. It may or may not include the new CT given to.

[Flow of games during bonus state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 68, the flow of the game in the bonus state will be described. FIG. 68 (A) is a diagram showing the flow of the game when the game shifts to the bonus state during the general gaming state (ART non-winning), and FIG. 68 (B) shows the case where the bonus state shifts to the normal ART. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game, and FIG. 68 (C) is a figure which shows the flow of the game when it shifts to the bonus state during CT. As shown in FIGS. 68 (A) to 68 (C), the pachislot machine 1 has a normal BB and a special BB as bonus types, and determines the bonus type when the bonus state shifts. At this time, if the special BB is determined, after the end of the bonus state, the process shifts to CT via ART preparation. On the other hand, when the normal BB is determined, the flow will be different depending on the state before the transition to the bonus state.

With reference to FIG. 68 (A), when the game shifts from the general gaming state to the normal BB, an ART lottery is performed during the normal BB based on the internal winning combination. If you win this ART lottery, after the bonus state ends, you will shift to normal ART via ART preparation. After winning the ART lottery, the number of ART games will be added to the lottery during the bonus state.

With reference to FIG. 68 (B), when the normal ART is changed to the normal BB, a CT lottery is performed at the end of the normal BB. This CT lottery has a 50% chance of winning, and if it wins, it shifts to CT via ART preparation after the end of the bonus state, and if it does not win, it shifts to normal ART via ART preparation after the end of the bonus state. To do. In addition, during the bonus state after shifting from the normal ART, an additional lottery for the number of ART games is also performed.

With reference to FIG. 68 (C), when the CT shifts to the normal BB or the special BB, the shift to the CT is performed via the preparation for ART after the end of the bonus state. In addition, during the bonus state after shifting from the normal ART, an additional lottery for the number of ART games is also performed.

[Data table used during bonus status]
Subsequently, the data table used during the bonus state will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71.

<Bonus type lottery table>
FIG. 69 is a bonus type lottery table for determining a bonus type (normal BB, special BB). The bonus type lottery table is referred to at the start of the bonus state, and defines the lottery value information for the bonus type in association with the state before the transition to the bonus state.

<Bonus lottery table with the number of ART games added>
FIG. 70 is a bonus lottery table for adding the number of ART games used for the ART lottery and the number of ART games added during the bonus state. The lottery table for adding the number of ART games in the bonus defines information on the lottery result of the ART lottery and the lottery value for the number of additional games in association with the bonus type and the internal winning combination.

The lottery table for adding the number of ART games during the bonus will be used for the ART lottery in the state of no ART winning (until the winning of the ART lottery in the normal BB transitioned from the general game state). That is, if the number of additional games is determined to be 1 or more (actually, at least 50 games) in the ART non-winning state, the ART lottery is won and the corresponding number of games is given. On the other hand, in the state after winning the ART, the lottery table for adding the number of ART games during the bonus is used for the lottery for adding the number of ART games.

<CT lottery table at the end of bonus>
FIG. 71 is a bonus end CT lottery table used for a CT lottery performed at the end of the bonus state. The CT lottery table at the end of the bonus defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the CT lottery in association with the bonus type and the game state before the transition to the bonus state. With reference to the CT lottery table at the end of the bonus shown in FIG. 71, for example, if the normal BB is performed during the normal ART, it can be seen that the CT is won with a probability of 50% at the end of the bonus state.

[Exceptional game flow during general game state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 72, an exceptional game flow during the general game state will be described. In the pachislot machine 1, basically, the normal gaming state is shifted to the CZ during the general gaming state, and the ART gaming state is aimed at by winning the ART lottery in the CZ. Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the ART gaming state is realized by notifying during the RT4 gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 72, the RT gaming state is controlled according to the combination of the displayed symbols. doing. As shown in FIG. 47, the combination of symbols for shifting the RT game state is displayed according to the order (pushing order) of the stop operation of the player, so that even if the notification is not performed. , It may accidentally shift to the RT4 game state.

Further, in the RT4 gaming state, the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" may be determined as the internal winning combination, so even in the general gaming state (non-ART), It is possible to display the reach eye (reach eye lip) to which a special privilege is given. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, when the player accidentally shifts to the RT4 gaming state during the general gaming state (non-ART), the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip" can be displayed. In such a state, it is possible to shift to the ART gaming state (normal ART) without going through the CZ.

More specifically, when the combinations "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are determined as internal winning combinations during the general game state and the RT4 game state, a flag conversion lottery is performed, and this When the flag conversion lottery is won, a notification is given to display the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip", and the right of ART is granted. On the contrary, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "replay" is performed, and the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip" is controlled so as not to be displayed.

<Flag conversion lottery table during non-ART>
FIG. 73 is a non-ART flag conversion lottery table used for the flag conversion lottery performed during the general game state and the RT4 game state. The non-ART flag conversion lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

[Notification by main side control]
In pachislot machines, conventionally, information on stop operations (pushing order, etc.) has been notified to the ART machine under the control of the sub (sub-control board 72) side, but the presence or absence of the notification is in the interest of the player ( In recent years, it has been required that the main (main control board 71) side, which manages the interests of the player, perform the notification in order to affect the so-called payout. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the information display 14 controlled by the main control board 71 is provided with an instruction monitor for notifying the stop operation information, and the stop operation information is notified under the control of the main side. It is supposed to be.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the notification (navigation) performed on the main side and the notification (navigation) performed on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 74, the main control board 71 notifies the information of the stop operation by displaying the numerical values of “1” to “11” on the instruction monitor. The numerical values of "1" to "11" uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation notified by each, and "1" to "3" indicate the types of reels that perform the first stop operation, respectively. "1" means that the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, "2" means that the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C, and "3". Means that the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R.

Further, "4" to "9" indicate the push order to be notified, "4" means that the push order is "left, middle, right", and "5" means that the push order is "left". "Left, right, middle" means "6" means that the push order is "middle, left, right", and "7" means that the push order is "middle, right, left". That is, "8" means that the push order is "right, left, middle", and "9" means that the push order is "right, middle, left".

Further, "10" and "11" are for notifying the role related to the bonus, and "10" means a combination of symbols "C_BB1" consisting of "white 7-white 7-white 7", and "11". Means the combination of symbols "C_BB2" consisting of "blue 7-blue 7-blue 7".

Here, although the numerical values of "1" to "11" notified on the main side uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation to be notified, not all players can clearly grasp the contents of the notification. Absent. That is, there is a possibility that some players may not be able to grasp the content of the notification simply by displaying "6" on the instruction monitor on the main side.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the content of the stop operation is notified on the sub side as well as the notification on the main side. Specifically, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with a display unit 100 controlled by a sub-control board 72, and notifies information on a stop operation under the control of the sub-side. For example, when notifying that the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and "1" is displayed on the sub side on the left reel 3L of the display unit 100. "1" is displayed above to notify that the left reel 3L is the target of the first stop operation. Similarly, when notifying the push order "middle, left, right", "6" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and "1" is displayed above the reel 3C in the display unit 100 on the sub side. , "2" is displayed above the left reel 3L, and "3" is displayed above the right reel 3R to notify that the pushing order is "middle, left, right". When "F_BB1" is determined as the internal winning combination, "10" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and "white 7-white 7-white 7" is displayed on the display unit 100 on the sub side. Is displayed to notify the player of the symbol to be aimed at.

As shown in FIG. 74 (A), during the preparation for ART, "Bell Navi", "Maintenance Lip Navi", "RT3 Transition Lip Navi" and "RT4 Transition Lip Navi" are performed under the control of the main side. The "bell navigation" notifies the push order for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "bell" for the combinations "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd". In addition, the "maintenance lip navigation" notifies the push order for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay" for the combinations "F_maintenance lip_1st" to "F_maintenance lip_3rd". In addition, the "RT3 transition lip navigation" notifies the push order for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "RT3 transition lip" for the combinations "F_RT3 transition lip_1st" to "F_RT3 transition lip_3rd". In addition, the "RT4 transition lip navigator" notifies the push order for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "RT4 transition lip" for the combinations "F_RT4 transition lip_123" to "F_RT4 transition lip_3rd".

The timing of the notification on the main side may be at least during one game in which the notification is performed, and is arbitrary. For example, the main side may be notified at the timing when the start operation is accepted, or the main side may be notified at the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the first stop operation to the third stop operation may be performed. The main side may be notified at the timing when any of the above is received. On the other hand, the timing of performing the notification on the sub side is preferably at least a timing before the first stop operation. In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, notification is performed on both the main side and the sub side at the timing when the start operation is accepted or when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started. As a result, before the player performs the stop operation, the stop operation information is notified on both the instruction monitor on the main side and the display unit 100 on the sub side.

Further, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), during the ART gaming state, "Bell Navi", "Maintenance Lip Navi", "RT3 Transition Lip Navi", and "RT4 Transition Lip Navi" are performed under the control of the main side. During the ART game state (RT4 game state), a flag conversion lottery is performed, and a push for displaying a combination of "triple chili lip", "reach eye lip", or "replay" symbols based on the lottery result. The order is notified, but this notification is not performed on the main side, but only on the sub side.

As mentioned above, the combination of the "triple chili lip" and "reach eye lip" symbols is related to the granting of special benefits, so the presence or absence of notification will affect the player's profit (ball output). Can also be considered. However, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a special privilege is actually given based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery, and the combination of the displayed symbols does not affect the given privilege. That is, if the flag conversion lottery is won, even if the combination of the "replay" symbols is displayed, a special privilege is given, and conversely, the flag conversion lottery is not won. In that case, even if the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" and "reach eye lip" can be displayed, no special privilege is given.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols displayed in this way does not affect the profit (ball output) of the player, the sub is not notified by the instruction monitor on the main side. Notification is performed by the display unit 100 only on the side.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 74 (C) and 74 (D), during the RT5 gaming state (inter-flag state), notification is performed to aim at a combination of symbols according to the combination related to the bonus carried over as the internal winning combination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), when the combination "F_BB1" is carried over, "white 7 navigation" is performed, and as shown in FIG. 74 (D), the combination "F_BB2" is carried over. If so, perform "Blue 7 Navi". "White 7 Navi" notifies the role "F_BB1" of the information of the stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols of "C_BB1", and "Blue 7 Navi" notifies the role "F_BB2" of the information of the stop operation. Notify the information of the stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols of "C_BB2".

Here, as described above in FIG. 48, in the inter-flag state, the combination related to the bonus and any of "off", "F_special 1", "F_special 2", and "F_special 3" are determined as the internal winning combination. If this is the case, the combination of BB symbols can be displayed, and if the other combinations are determined as the internal winning combination together with the combination related to the bonus, the combination of BB symbols cannot be displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 74 (C) and 74 (D), when the main control board 71 is controlled on the main side, the combination related to the carry-over bonus and the “off”, “F_special combination 1”, and “F_special combination” Only when either "2" or "F_special role 3" is determined as the internal winning combination, "white 7 navigation" or "blue 7 navigation" is performed. As a result, the navigation on the main side can be performed at an appropriate timing in which the winning combination related to the bonus can be won.

In addition, the main control board 71 may perform "white 7 navigation" or "blue 7 navigation" only after notifying that the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination (bonus notification). Here, the bonus notification is performed, for example, by displaying the bonus confirmation screen or turning on the bonus confirmation lamp.

As an example, when the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to perform an effect (so-called continuous effect) performed over several games and display a bonus confirmation screen according to the result of this continuous effect. It is commonly done. If "White 7 Navi" or the like is performed on the main side during this continuous production, the result of the continuous production may be known in the middle, which may spoil the interest. Therefore, the main control board 71 of the pachislot machine 1 performs "white 7 navigation" or "blue 7 navigation" only after the bonus notification is made. The method of making the timing of the bonus announcement available on the main side is arbitrary.

As one method, when the combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 determines the number of games required to announce the bonus, and after digesting this number of games, "white 7 navigation" or "blue 7" A method of performing "navigation" is conceivable. More specifically, when the main control board 71 determines the number of games required for the bonus notification, the main control board 71 notifies the sub control board 72 of the number of games. The sub-control board 72 controls the effect according to the number of games, and displays the bonus confirmation screen at the timing when the number of games is exhausted, so that the timing when the bonus notification is made can be grasped on the main side. That is, the main control board 71 counts the number of unit games since the bonus-related combination is determined as the internal winning combination without carrying over the bonus-related combination, and after the counting result reaches the predetermined number of times. "White 7 Navi" or "Blue 7 Navi" when the bonus-related role and any of "Out of line", "F_Special role 1", "F_Special role 2", and "F_Special role 3" are determined as internal winning roles. I do.

Further, as another method, a method of controlling the bonus notification on the main side instead of the sub side can be considered. More specifically, when the main control board 71 determines the bonus-related combination as the internal winning combination in a state where the bonus-related combination is not carried over, the display unit 100 performs an effect (at least the number of games required for the effect). It is determined and notified to the sub-control board 72. By executing the effect notified by the sub-control board 72 and displaying the bonus confirmation screen, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is made on the main side.

Of course, the main side may be able to grasp the timing when the bonus notification is made by another method. In this case, since the main control board 71 cannot receive the signal from the sub control board 72 or the like, it is necessary to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is made based on the signal that the main control board 71 can accept. .. For example, since the main control board 71 can accept the signal associated with the stop operation, a predetermined stop operation (for example, other than forward pressing) is performed in a state where the combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination. In that case, it is possible to announce the bonus. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 acquires information on the internal winning combination and information on the stop operation from the main control board 71, and the combination of these information is a predetermined combination (internal winning combination “combination related to bonus””. , Stop operation "other than forward push"), give a bonus notification. Since the trigger of such a bonus notification can be grasped by the main control board 71 as well, the timing at which the bonus notification is made can be grasped on the main side.

[Operation description of main control board]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 to 91, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 31 of the main control board 71 by using the program will be described.

<Main pachislot operation processing controlled by the main CPU>
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after the power is turned on) of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 31 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 75 (hereinafter referred to as the main flow).

First, when the power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1, the main CPU 31 performs an initialization process at the time of turning on the power (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, whether the settings have been changed appropriately, and the like, and initialization is performed according to the determination result.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 33 is cleared. The designated storage area referred to here is a storage area such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area, which requires data to be erased for each unit game (game).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs medal reception / start check processing (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor 42S and the start switch 6S is checked.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an internal lottery process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 31 refers to the internal lottery table (FIGS. 39 and 40) according to the current gaming state, and draws a combination to be determined as the internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the combinations "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" are determined as the internal winning combinations in the internal lottery process of S4 (S5). When the combination "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" are determined as the internal winning combination (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently turns on the RT5 game state flag and sets the game state to the inter-flag game state (S6).

Following the processing of S6, or when it is determined in S5 that the combinations "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" have not been determined as the internal winning combination (NO), the main CPU 31 is subsequently determined by the state described later in FIG. The game control process is performed (S7).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs the main side navigation control process (S8). In this process, the main CPU 31 sets navigation data according to the current gaming state and the internal winning combination based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 74. The set navigation data is stored in the start command and notified to the sub-control board 72. In addition, the notification according to the set navigation data is performed at an arbitrary timing.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs the reel stop initial setting process described later in FIG. 86 (S9). In this process, the reel stop control information used for the stop control is determined according to the internal winning combination determined in S5 and the current gaming state. The determined reel stop control information is stored in the main RAM 33 and used in the reel stop control process of S12.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a start command transmission process (S10). In this process, the main CPU 31 generates start command data and transmits it to the sub-control board 72. It should be noted that the start command data includes various information necessary for the production such as the internal winning combination.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel rotation start process after performing the wait process (S11). In this process, the main CPU 31 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, each reel is accelerated and controlled until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed by an interrupt process executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec), and then the reels are accelerated. It is controlled so that the constant speed is maintained.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel stop control process described later in FIG. 87 (S12). In this process, using the reel stop control information determined in S9, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing at which the left stop button 7L, the middle stop button 7C, and the right stop button 7R are pressed, respectively. Reel.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a winning determination medal payout process (S13). In this winning determination medal payout process, as a result of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R being stopped, based on the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line, according to the combination of the symbols such as medal payout and replay operation. Give profits. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a winning operation command transmission process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 31 generates data of the winning operation command and transmits it to the sub-control board 72. The winning operation command data includes various information such as a combination of symbols displayed along the valid line.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs the BB check process described later in FIG. 88 (S15). In this process, the main CPU 31 controls the operation and termination of the bonus state. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs the RT check process described later in FIGS. 89 and 90 (S16). In this process, the main CPU 31 controls to shift the RT game state based on the combination of the displayed symbols.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs the CZ / ART end time processing described later in FIG. 91 (S17). In this process, the main CPU 31 performs a pullback lottery of CZ. When the CZ / ART end processing is performed, the main CPU 31 returns the processing to S2 assuming that one game (unit game) is completed.

<Control processing by state>
Next, the state-specific control process will be described with reference to FIG. 76. In the state-based control process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the RT4 gaming state (S31). In the RT4 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the flag conversion process described later in FIG. 77 (S32).

Following the processing of S32, or when it is determined in S31 that the RT4 gaming state is not in progress (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the normal gaming state (S33). ). When in the normal gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the normal middle start process (S34) described later in FIG. 78, and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CZ (S35). If it is in CZ (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a CZ middle start process (S36), which will be described later in FIG. 79, and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not CZ (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in normal ART (S37). When the normal ART is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a normal ART start-time process (S38) described later in FIG. 83, and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not normal ART (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CT (S39). If CT is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a CT start-time process (S40), which will be described later in FIG. 84, and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not CT (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the bonus state (S41). If it is in the bonus state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the BB start time process described later in FIG. 85 (S42), and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not the bonus state (NO), the main CPU 31 performs other processing (S43) and ends the state-specific control processing. For example, when the main CPU 31 is preparing for ART, the main CPU 31 performs processing according to the preparation.

<Flag conversion process>
Next, the flag conversion process will be described with reference to FIG. 77. In the flag conversion process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the start of CT (S50). If it is the start of CT (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently draws and sets the table number used for the flag conversion lottery during CT with reference to the flag conversion table lottery table during CT (FIG. 64). (S51).

Following the processing of S51, or when it is not the start of CT in S50 (NO), the main CPU 31 sets a flag conversion lottery table according to the current state (S52). For example, when the current state is the RT4 gaming state during non-ART, the non-ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 73) is set, and when the current state is the RT4 gaming state during normal ART, the non-ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 73) is set. , The ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 58) is set, and when the current state is the RT4 gaming state during CT, the CT flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 65) is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a flag conversion lottery based on the internal winning combination (S53), and subsequently determines whether or not the winning is won (S54). If the flag conversion lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the flag conversion process (S55). In this process, for example, when the combination "F_1 certainty lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination "F_1 certainty lip" is treated as the combination "triple chili lip".

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in non-ART (S56). That is, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the transition to the RT4 gaming state is accidentally performed in response to the player's stop operation in a state in which the notification of the general gaming state (non-ART) is not performed. judge. If the current game state is non-ART (YES), the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of ART sets (S57), then sets ART preparation in the next game (S58), and flags. End the conversion process. On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not in non-ART (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the flag conversion process.

Further, in S54, if the flag conversion lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 performs the flag maintenance process (S59) and ends the flag conversion process. In this flag maintenance process, for example, when the combination "F_1 certainty lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination "F_1 certainty lip" is treated as the combination "replay".

<Processing at start during normal operation>
Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the normal middle start process will be described. In the normal middle start process, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52 (A) and performs CZ lottery based on the current CZ lottery state and the internal winning combination (S61).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ lottery has been won (S62). When the CZ lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the CZ of the type won in the next game (S63), and then sets the value corresponding to the CZ of the winning type in the CZ game number counter. (S64). The CZ game number counter is a counter that counts the duration of CZ, and when CZ1 is won, the first game number (for example, 12) is set in the CZ game number counter (first half). If CZ2 is won, the second game number (for example, 15) is set in the CZ game number counter (first half), and if CZ3 is won, the fourth game number is set in the CZ game number counter. (For example, 17) is set.

Following the processing of S64, or if the CZ lottery was not won in S62 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently referred to the normal medium-high probability lottery table of FIG. 51 (A) for internal winning. The transition lottery of the lottery state of the CZ is performed based on the winning combination (S65), the lottery state of the CZ is updated based on the result of the transition lottery (S66), and the normal middle start process is completed.

<Processing at start during CZ>
Next, the process at the start during CZ will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In the CZ middle start process, the main CPU 31 first determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CZ1 (S71). If it is in CZ1 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate processing (S72) described later in FIGS. 80 and 81, and ends the CZ intermediate start processing.

On the other hand, if it is not in CZ1 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CZ2 (S73). If it is in CZ2 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate process (S74) described later in FIGS. 80 and 81, and ends the CZ intermediate start process. In the present embodiment, CZ1 and CZ2 differ only in the ranks (modes or points) in which the degree of expectation for winning the ART lottery is different, and the basic processing is the same. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the processing in CZ1 and CZ2 will be described as one processing as the processing in CZ1 (CZ2).

On the other hand, if it is not in CZ2 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the CZ3 middle process (S75) described later in FIG. 82, and ends the CZ middle start process.

<CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate processing>
Next, the processing during CZ1 (CZ2) will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. In the CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate processing, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the first half of CZ1 or CZ2 (S81). The main CPU 31 shifts the process to S82 when it is the first half (YES), and shifts the process to S91 of FIG. 81 when it is not the first half (the second half) (NO).

In the case of the first half of the CZ1, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ1 middle mode-up lottery table (FIG. 53) and performs the mode-up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S82). Similarly, in the case of the first half of the CZ2, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ2 middle point lottery table (FIG. 54) and performs the point-up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S82). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 updates the mode (or points) based on the lottery result of S82 (S83).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the freeze is won in the lottery of S82 (S84). If the freeze is won (YES), the main CPU 31 performs a freeze process for temporarily stopping the progress of the game, and adds 1 to the number of ART sets and the number of CT sets (S85). In this process, the main CPU 31 further determines and sets the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59 (A)). When a freeze occurs, "ART level 2" is determined as the ART level. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S86), and ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

On the other hand, if the freeze is not won in S84 (NO), the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the CZ game number counter (first half) (S87). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (S88). If the CZ game number counter (first half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the second half of CZ1 or CZ2 in the next game (S89), and ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2). To do.

Subsequently, referring to FIG. 81, in the case of the latter half of CZ1 or CZ2, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the first game of the latter half (S91). In the case of the first game of the second half, the ART lottery is performed based on the mode or points of the first half with reference to the ART lottery table in CZ (FIGS. 55 (A) and (B)) (S92). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S93).

If the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets and draws the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59 (A)). , Set (S94). Following the processing of S94, or when the ART lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 sets a predetermined value in the CZ game number counter (second half) (S95). For example, the main CPU 31 sets "4" in the CZ game number counter (second half) when the ART lottery is won, and sets "3" in the CZ game number counter (second half) when the ART lottery is not won. "Is set.

Following the processing of S95, or if it is not one game in the latter half of S91 (NO), the main CPU 31 serves as an internal winning combination with reference to the ART lottery table in CZ (FIG. 55 (C)). Based on this, an ART lottery is performed (S96), and it is determined whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S97). If the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets and draws the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59 (A)). And set (S98).

Following the processing of S98, or when the ART lottery is not won in S97 (NO), the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the CZ game number counter (second half) (S99). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (S100). If the CZ game number counter (second half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the number of ART sets is 1 or more (S101). When the number of ART sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S102), and ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2). .. On the other hand, when the number of ART sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the time of CZ failure (S103) and ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

<CZ3 middle processing>
Next, the processing during CZ3 will be described with reference to FIG. 82. In the CZ3 middle processing, first, the main CPU 31 referred to the CZ middle ART lottery table (FIG. 56 (D)) and performed an ART lottery based on the internal winning combination (S121), and did the ART lottery win? It is determined whether or not (S122).

If the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets and the number of CT sets (S123). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the freeze has been won in the ART lottery of S121 (S124). If the freeze is won (YES), the main CPU 31 performs a freeze process to temporarily stop the progress of the game (S125).

Following the processing of S125, or if the freeze has not been won in S124 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently draws the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59 (A)). And set (S126). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in progress for the next game (S127), and ends CZ3 middle processing.

On the other hand, if the ART lottery is not won in S122 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CZ game number counter (S128). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter is 0 (S129). If the CZ game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing during CZ3.

On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter is 0, the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of ART sets, and draws and sets the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59 (A)). (S130). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S131), and ends the CZ3 middle process.

<Processing at start during normal ART>
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the process at the start during normal ART will be described. In the normal start processing during ART, the main CPU 31 first adds 1 to the ART continuous game number counter (S141). The ART continuous game number counter is a counter that normally counts the number of games that ART has continued. In the present embodiment, in addition to the ART continuation game number counter, an ART end game number counter that counts the number of games that can be normally continued by ART is provided. Then, the pachislot machine 1 compares the value of the ART continuous game number counter with the value of the ART end game number counter, and when the value of the ART continuous game number counter reaches the value of the ART end game number counter, the ART game state is changed. finish.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the CT lottery table during ART (FIG. 61), performs a CT lottery based on the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination (S142), and whether or not the CT lottery is won. Is determined (S143). If the CT lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of CT sets, sets 8 to the CT game number counter (S144), and then sets the type that wins the next game. CT is set (S145).

Following the processing of S145, or when the CT lottery is not won in S143 (NO), the main CPU 31 refers to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59 (B)) and counts the number of ART continuous games. The ART level is drawn and set based on the value of (S146). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 draws and sets the CT lottery state of the migration destination based on the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination with reference to the normal ART medium-high probability lottery table (FIG. 60) (S147). ..

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the additional lottery table (FIG. 62) during normal ART, performs an additional lottery for the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S148), and determines whether or not the additional lottery has been won. Judgment (S149). If the additional lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S150).

Following the processing of S150, or when the additional lottery is not won in S149 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently reaches the value of the ART continuous game number counter to the value of the ART end game number counter. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S151). If the value of the ART continuation game number counter does not reach the value of the ART end game number counter (NO), the main CPU 31 normally ends the process at the start during ART.

On the other hand, when the value of the ART continuation game number counter reaches the value of the ART end game number counter (YES), the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the ART set number (S152), and then at the end of ART. It is set (S153), and the normal start processing during ART is ended.

<Processing at start during CT>
Next, the process at the start during CT will be described with reference to FIG. 84. In the process at the start of CT, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the additional lottery table during CT (FIG. 66) and performs an additional lottery for the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S161), and the additional lottery is performed. It is determined whether or not the player has won (S162).

If the additional lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S163). As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT, the amount of addition per time increases.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is the combination “triple chili lip” (that is, whether or not it is converted to the combination “triple chili lip” in the flag conversion process of FIG. 77) (S164). ). When the internal winning combination is the combination "triple chili lip" (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently resets 8 to the CT game number counter (S165), and ends the process at the start during CT. Further, when the internal winning combination is not the combination "triple chili lip", the (NO) main CPU 31 ends the processing at the start during CT.

In S162, when the additional lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the additional lottery table for the number of sets during CT (FIG. 67) and determines the number of CT sets based on the internal winning combination. An additional lottery is performed (S166), and it is determined whether or not the additional lottery for the number of CT sets has been won (S167). If the lottery for adding the number of CT sets is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of CT sets (S168), and ends the processing at the start during CT.

On the other hand, if the additional lottery for the number of CT sets is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CT game number counter (S169), and subsequently, as a result of the subtraction, the CT game number counter. Is determined to be 0 (S170). If the CT game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the process at the start during CT.

When the CT game number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CT set number (S171). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the number of CT sets is 1 or more (S172). When the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets 8 in the CT game number counter (S173), and ends the process at the start during CT. On the other hand, when the number of CT sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 ends CT, sets a normal ART for the next game (S174), and ends the processing at the start during CT.

<Processing at start during BB>
Next, the process at the start during BB will be described with reference to FIG. 85. In the process at the start of BB, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the bonus lottery table for adding the number of ART games (FIG. 70), and draws the number of ART games added based on the internal winning combination (S181). It is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won (S182). If the additional lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the process at the start during BB.

On the other hand, when the additional lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S183). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the number of ART sets is 0 (S184). If the number of ART sets is not 0, the main CPU 31 ends the BB start process. On the other hand, when the number of ART sets is 0, the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of ART sets (S185) and ends the process at the start during BB.

<Reel stop initial setting process>
Next, the reel stop initial setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 86. In the reel stop initial setting process, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (not shown) and acquires the reel stop number based on the internal winning combination or the like (S191). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the rotating cylinder stop initial setting table and acquires each information based on the rotating cylinder stop number (S192). In this process, the main CPU 31 acquires various information associated with the rotation stop number, such as determination data for each pressing order.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 stores the rotating identifier in the symbol code storage area (not shown) (S193). That is, the main CPU 31 sets the bits of the entire symbol code storage area (excluding the unused area) to "1". Subsequently, the main CPU 31 stores 3 in the stop button non-operation counter (S194), and ends the reel stop initial setting process. The stop button non-operation counter is for determining the number of stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R that have not been stopped by the player, and is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 33.

<Reel stop control process>
Subsequently, the reel stop control process will be described with reference to FIG. 87. In the reel stop control process, the main CPU 31 first determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S201). This process is a process of determining whether or not a signal is output from the stop switch 7S. If the main CPU 31 determines that the valid stop button has not been pressed (NO), the main CPU 31 repeatedly executes the process of step S201.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 31 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (YES), the pressing order storage area (not shown) and the operation stop button storage area (not shown) depend on the pressed stop button. (Not shown) and is updated (S202). That is, the main CPU 31 manages the type of the pressed stop button by updating the operation stop button storage area, and updates the pressing order storage area based on the type of the pressed stop button and its order. Use to manage the order of stop operations (push order).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operation counter (S203), determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S204), and stores the stop start position in the main RAM 33 based on the symbol counter (S204). S205). The stop start position is a symbol position corresponding to the symbol counter of the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 7S.

Next, the main CPU 31 executes the sliding piece number determination process (S206). This sliding piece number determination process determines the number of sliding pieces specified at the stop start position based on the reel stop control information (stop table group) selected from the reel stop initial setting table based on the internal winning combination. It is a process.

Next, the main CPU 31 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72, and stores the generated reel stop command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 33. The generation process is executed (S167). This reel stop command data represents the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position, the number of sliding pieces (or the planned stop position), and the like.

Next, the main CPU 31 determines the scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the number of slip pieces determination data, and stores the stop schedule position in the main RAM 33 (S208). The planned stop position is a symbol position obtained by adding any of the predetermined numerical values "0" to "4" defined as the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped. Is.

Next, the main CPU 31 sets the scheduled stop position as the search symbol position (S209). Next, the main CPU 31 executes the symbol code storage process (S210). This symbol code storage process acquires the symbol code of the check symbol position data for checking the symbol position of the rotating reel.

Next, the main CPU 31 updates the symbol code storage area from the symbol code acquired in the symbol code storage process (S211). Next, the main CPU 31 performs a control change process (S212). In this control change process, the stop information group used for stopping the reel is updated when the reel is at a specific stop position.

Next, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the pressed stop button is released (S213). This process is a process of determining whether or not a signal is no longer output from the stop switch 7S.

If the main CPU 31 determines that the pressed stop button has not been released (NO), the main CPU 31 repeatedly executes the process of step S213. On the other hand, when the main CPU 31 determines that the pressed stop button is released (YES), the main CPU 31 transmits a reel stop command (S214).

Next, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (S215). Here, if it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 executes the attraction priority storage process (S216), and executes the process of step S201. In this pull-in priority storage process, the pull-in priority of all the symbols of the rotating reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 ends the reel stop control process.

<BB check process>
Subsequently, the BB check process will be described with reference to FIG. 88. In the BB check process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is in the bonus state (S221). If it is in the bonus state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently processes the winning determination medal payout process from the BB payout number counter that counts the number of medals that can be paid out during the bonus state (S13 in FIG. 75). The number of medals paid out in (S222) is subtracted.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the BB payout number counter has become less than 0 (S223). If the BB payout counter is not less than 0 (NO), the BB check process is terminated, while if the BB payout counter is less than 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently continues. Process at the end of the bonus (S224). In this process, the main CPU 31 clears various information in the bonus state and sets the RT1 game state flag to ON.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the CT lottery table at the end of the bonus (FIG. 71), performs the CT lottery at the end of the bonus (S225), and determines whether or not the CT lottery has been won (S226). If the CT lottery is won, the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of CT sets (S227). If the CT lottery is won when the number of ART sets is 0, 1 is added to the number of CT sets in S227, and 1 is added to the number of ART sets.

Following the processing of S227, or if the CT lottery has not been won in S226 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more (NO). S228). When the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends the bonus state, sets ART preparation in the next game (S229), and performs a BB check process. finish.

On the other hand, when neither the number of ART sets nor the number of CT sets is 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends the bonus state and sets the normal game state in the next game (S230). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 draws and sets the lottery state of CZ (S231) with reference to the normal medium-high probability lottery table (FIG. 51 (B)), and ends the BB check process.

Further, when the bonus state is not in S221 (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the combination of BB symbols (C_BB1, 2) is displayed (S232). If the combination of BB symbols is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the BB check process.

On the other hand, when the combination of the symbols of BB is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently draws and sets the bonus type with reference to the bonus type lottery table (FIG. 69) (S233). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 sets a predetermined value (for example, 216) in the BB payout number counter (S234), performs the bonus start processing (S235), and ends the BB check processing. In the bonus start processing, the main CPU 31 starts the operation of the bonus and performs various processing such as setting the bonus state in the next game.

<RT check processing>
Subsequently, the RT check process will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. In the RT check process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the RT5 game state is in progress (S241). When the RT5 game state is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while when the RT5 game state is not in progress (NO), the main CPU 31 is subsequently in the RT0 game state. It is determined whether or not it is (S242).

When the RT0 gaming state is in S242 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the combination of the “bell spilled eyes” symbols is displayed (S243). If the "bell spilled eye" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if the "bell spilled eye" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 determines. Subsequently, the RT2 gaming state flag is set to on, the RT2 gaming state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state (S244), and the RT check process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is not in the RT0 gaming state in S242 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT1 gaming state (S245). When the RT1 game state is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the combination of the “bell spilled eyes” symbols is displayed (S246). When "bell spilled eyes" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the RT2 game state flag on and turns off the RT1 game state flag, and shifts from the RT1 game state to the RT2 game state. (S247), and the RT check process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the "bell spilled eye" is not displayed in S246 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not 20 games have passed in the RT1 game state (S248). If 20 games have not passed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if 20 games have passed (YES), the main CPU 31 turns off the RT1 game status flag and RT1 The game state is changed to the RT0 game state (S249), and the RT check process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is not in the RT1 gaming state in S245 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT2 gaming state (S250). When the RT2 game state is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the combination of the symbols of the "RT3 transition lip" is displayed (S251). If "RT3 transition rip" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if "RT3 transition rip" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 is Subsequently, the RT3 game state flag is set to on and the RT2 game state flag is turned off to shift from the RT2 game state to the RT3 game state (S252), and the RT check process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is not in the RT2 gaming state in S250 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT3 gaming state (S261). When the RT3 game state is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not a combination of symbols of "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition lip" is displayed (S262). When "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition lip" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the RT2 game state flag on and turns off the RT3 game state flag, and changes from the RT3 game state to the RT2 game. It shifts to the state (S263) and ends the RT check process.

On the other hand, when neither "bell spilled eyes" nor "RT2 transition lip" is displayed in S262, the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the combination of the symbols of "RT4 transition lip" is displayed. (S264). If "RT4 transition rip" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if "RT4 transition rip" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 is Subsequently, the RT4 game state flag is set to on and the RT3 game state flag is turned off to shift from the RT3 game state to the RT4 game state (S265).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not ART preparation is set (S266). If ART preparation is not set (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if ART preparation is set (YES), the main CPU 31 has the number of CT sets. Determines whether or not is 1 or more (S267).

When the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 sets CT in the next game, sets 8 in the CT game number counter (S268), and ends the RT check process. On the other hand, when the number of CT sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 sets a normal ART for the next game, sets a predetermined value in the ART end game number counter (S269), and ends the RT check process. To do.

On the other hand, if it is not in the RT3 gaming state (NO) in S261, since it is in the RT4 gaming state, the main CPU 31 subsequently displays a combination of symbols of "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition lip". It is determined whether or not it is (S270). If neither "bell spilled eyes" nor "RT2 transition rip" is displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition rip" is displayed. If it is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the RT2 game state flag on and turns off the RT4 game state flag, shifts from the RT4 game state to the RT2 game state (S271), and performs the RT check process. finish.

<Processing at the end of CZ / ART>
Subsequently, the CZ / ART end-time processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the CZ / ART end time processing, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is a CZ failure time or an ART end time (S281). If it is neither at the time of CZ failure nor at the end of ART (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing at the end of CZ / ART, while at the time of CZ failure or at the end of ART (YES). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ lottery table (FIG. 52 (B)) to perform a CZ pullback lottery (S282), and determines whether or not the pullback lottery has been won (S283).

When the pullback lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the CZ of the type winning the next game (S284), and sets the value corresponding to the CZ of the winning type in the CZ game number counter. (S285), the processing at the end of CZ / ART is terminated.

On the other hand, if the pullback lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the normal game state for the next game (S286). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 draws and sets the lottery state of CZ (S287) with reference to the normal medium-high probability lottery table (FIG. 51 (B)), and ends the CZ / ART end time processing.

[Explanation of operation of sub-control board]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control board 72 by using the program will be described.

<Sub-side navigation control processing>
First, the sub-side navigation control process will be described with reference to FIG. 92. In the sub-side navigation control process, first, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the navigation data has been acquired (S301). The sub CPU 81 acquires the navigation data determined by the main control board 71 from the start command data received from the main control board 71. In the process of S301, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the navigation data is included in the received start command data.

When the navigation data is acquired (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently sets the sub-side navigation data according to the navigation data (S302). With reference to FIG. 74, for example, when the sub CPU 81 acquires the navigation data “4”, the sub CPU 81 sets the navigation data for notifying the push order “left, middle, right” as the sub side navigation data. To do. As a result, the content of the stop operation can be notified on both the main side and the sub side.

On the other hand, if the navigation data has not been acquired (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not navigation (notification of stop operation) is necessary (S303). In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81 needs to be navigated, for example, when a flag conversion lottery is performed on the main control board 71 or when a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination on the main control board 71. Is determined. The result of the flag conversion lottery and the type of the internal winning combination are included in the start command data, and the sub CPU 81 can determine whether or not navigation is necessary from various information included in the start command data. ..

If it is determined that navigation is not necessary (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the sub-side navigation control process. On the other hand, when it is determined that navigation is necessary (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the sub-side navigation data according to various lottery results (S304), and ends the sub-side navigation control process. For example, in the sub CPU 81, when the combination "F_certain chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination and the flag conversion lottery is won, the navigation data for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "triple chili lip" is displayed. (For example, navigation data that aims at the chili symbol by pushing forward) is set, and the combination "F_certain chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, and when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the symbol of "replay" Set navigation data for displaying combinations (for example, navigation data indicating a pressing order other than forward pressing). As a result, even if the main side does not notify the content of the stop operation, the sub side alone can notify the content of the stop operation.

<Player registration process>
Next, the player registration process will be described with reference to FIG. 93. In the player registration process, first, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the registration operation has been accepted (S311). For example, when a predetermined operation is accepted on the registration screen displayed when the operation of the registration button 212b is accepted on the menu screen 212 (see FIG. 29) of the first sub display device 201, the sub CPU 81 determines that the registration operation has been accepted. To do.

When the registration operation is accepted (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently sets the player registration state (S312). As will be described later, in the situation where the player registration state is set, the sub CPU 81 can display the game information screens 213, 214, 215 (see FIG. 29) on the first sub display device 201. Controls the display screen of 201.

On the other hand, if the registration operation is not accepted (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the registration deletion operation has been accepted (S313). For example, when a specific operation is accepted on the registration screen of the first sub display device 201, the sub CPU 81 determines that the registration deletion operation has been accepted. If the registration deletion operation is not accepted (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the player registration process.

On the other hand, when the registration deletion operation is accepted (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently clears the player registration state. As will be described later, in the situation where the player registration state is cleared, the sub CPU 81 makes it impossible to display the game information screens 213, 214, 215 (see FIG. 29) on the first sub display device 201, and displays the first sub display. It controls the display screen of the device 201.

<History management process>
Next, the history management process will be described with reference to FIG. 94. In the history management process, first, the sub CPU 81 acquires game results from various command data received from the main control board 71 (S321). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 updates the game history (S322) and ends the history management process. For example, the sub CPU 81 can grasp the type of the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination from the start command data, and the combination of symbols displayed from the winning operation command data (that is, determined as the internal winning combination). Whether or not a role is won) can be grasped. Further, the sub CPU 81 can grasp the current gaming state and the transition status of the gaming state from, for example, start command data. From these game results acquired from various command data, the sub CPU 81 has various values such as, for example, the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, the number of games (number of games), the number of CZs, the number of successful CZs, the number of wins for each role, and the probability of winning. Game history can be managed.

[Switching the display screen of the 1st sub display device]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a method of switching the display screen of the first sub-display device 201 in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 (A) is an example of transition of the display screen of the first sub-display device 201 in a situation where the player registration state is not set, and FIG. 95 (B) shows a player registration state is set. This is an example of transition of the display screen of the first sub-display device 201 in the situation.

As shown in FIG. 95 (A), in the situation where the player registration state is not set, the sub control board 72 (sub CPU 81) displays the display screen displayed on the first sub display device 201 on the top screen 211 and the menu. It is controlled so that transition is possible only between various display screens that can be transitioned from the screen 212 and the menu screen 212. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 has a top screen 211 and a menu screen 212 based on a touch operation (for example, a tap operation for a predetermined button or a swipe operation on a display screen) acquired via the touch sensor 201a. Switch the display screen between. On the other hand, in the situation where the player registration state is not set, the sub-control board 72 controls the display of the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 to be impossible. That is, in the situation where the player registration state is not set, the player cannot display the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 on the first sub-display device 201.

Further, as shown in FIG. 95B, in the situation where the player registration state is set, the sub-control board 72 displays the display screen displayed on the first sub-display device 201 on the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212. In addition to various display screens that can be transitioned from the menu screen 212, control is possible so that transitions can be made between the game information screens 213, 214, and 215. That is, the sub-control board 72 controls not only the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212 but also the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 so that they can be displayed based on the touch operation acquired via the touch sensor 201a. As a result, in the situation where the player registration state is set, the player can display the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 on the first sub-display device 201.

As shown in FIG. 95B, the transition order of the display screens between the top screen 211, the menu screen 212, and the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 is arbitrary. For example, the top screen 211 may be directly transitioned to the game information screens 213, 214, 215, or the top screen 211 may be transitioned to the game information screens 213, 214, 215 only via the menu screen 212. Good.

In this respect, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game information screens 213, 214, 215 cannot be directly transitioned from the top screen 211, and the game information screens 213, 214, 215 can be made only through the menu screen 212. It is possible to transition to. More specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 can be transitioned to by swiping the menu screen 212.

Here, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are not display screens provided with buttons corresponding to the menu screen 212, but display screens provided completely independently of the menu screen 212. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game history, which is information indicating the result of the game in which the player has a strong interest during the game, is obtained from related information such as the payout arrangement and the volume control, which is not related to the result of the game. Display independently. Then, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in the situation where the player registration state is set, it is possible to transition to the game information screens 213, 214, 215 without requiring the menu selection operation on the menu screen 212. As a result, in the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to facilitate access to information (game history) that the player wants to confirm in a situation where the player registration state is set.

On the other hand, the menu selection operation on the menu screen 212 cannot transition to the game information screens 213, 214, 215, and the game information screens 213, 214, 215 cannot be transitioned unless a swipe operation that is not on the menu display is performed. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation for transitioning to the game information screens 213, 214, 215 can be handled as a hidden command in the situation where the player registration state is set. For the player, his own knowledge of the pachislot machine 1 allows him to see a more detailed game history that cannot be seen by other players with little knowledge, so that he can play the game more advantageously than the other players. As a result, it can be expected that the game will be actively performed.

(Display of the top screen from the game information screen)
The pachi-slot machine 1 transitions from the game information screens 213, 214, 215 to the top screen 211 manually or automatically by the player. Specifically, when the back button is operated on the game information screens 213, 214, 215, the display screen is changed from the game information screens 213, 214, 215 to the top screen 211 (manual transition). Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied while the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are displayed, the screen automatically transitions to the top screen 211 regardless of the operation of the player (automatic transition).

More specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, while the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are displayed, the insertion operation (operation of the MAX bet button 11 operation, operation of the 1-bet button, and insertion of a medal into the medal insertion slot 22). When the closing operation) is performed, the screen automatically transitions to the top screen 211. In a state where there is a high probability that the role related to the replay that activates the replay is determined as the internal winning combination (high lip state), such as in the ART game state, the medal is automatically activated by the operation of the replay accompanying the replay winning. As a result of being thrown into the game information screens 213, 214, 215 may be limited in the high lip state. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, when medals are automatically inserted by the operation of the re-game, when the start operation is performed instead of inserting the medals, the game information screens 213, 214, 215 are automatically displayed on the top screen. Transition to 211.

That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the re-game operation is performed, when the start operation is performed, the game information screens 213, 214, 215 automatically transition to the top screen 211, and the re-game operation is performed. If is not performed, when the input operation is performed, the game information screens 213, 214, 215 automatically transition to the top screen 211.

(Display of the top screen (or menu screen) from the display screen according to the menu)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, various display screens (registration screen, explanation screen, array payout screen, reach eye screen, WEB introduction screen, and volume adjustment screen) that can be changed by the menu selection operation on the menu screen 212 can be displayed by the player. The transition to the top screen 211 (or menu screen 212) is performed manually or automatically. Specifically, when a predetermined button (for example, a top button) is operated on various display screens, the display screen is changed from the various display screens to the top screen 211, and a specific button (for example, a top button) is displayed on the various display screens. , Back button) is operated to transition the display screen from the various display screens to the menu screen 212 (manual transition). Further, when a predetermined time elapses while various display screens are displayed, the screen automatically transitions to the top screen 211 (or menu screen 212) regardless of the player's operation.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the time for transitioning to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) is different depending on the type of the display screen currently displayed. For example, if the volume adjustment screen for adjusting the volume output from the pachislot machine 1 is displayed for a long time, it may be adjusted to an unintended volume due to an erroneous operation, and the erroneous operation makes other players uncomfortable. Therefore, the transition to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) is performed in a shorter time than the other display screens. On the other hand, the registration screen transitions to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) in a longer time than the other display screens in order to facilitate the registration of the player.

That is, various display screens are set with a time for transition to the top screen 211 (or menu screen 212), and the volume adjustment screen is set with a shorter time than other display screens. A longer time is set on the registration screen than on other display screens.

(Selection function for menu operation availability)
In the pachislot machine 1, the player shifts from the menu screen 212 to the registration screen, the explanation screen, the arrangement payout screen, the reach eye screen, the WEB introduction screen, and the volume adjustment screen, so that the player can perform various display screens. You can perform operations and check various information. Here, the functions that can be selected by the player may be restricted according to the settings of the game store.

For example, a game store can make it impossible for a player to adjust the volume by limiting the transition from the menu screen 212 to the volume control screen (for example, the volume button 212g is not displayed on the menu screen 212). ..

[Modified example of the first embodiment]
The pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment has been described above. Subsequently, a modified example of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described.

<CT precursor game and notification lottery during normal ART>
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, in order to facilitate understanding, when an advantageous state (for example, CT) is won, the next game is immediately shifted to the advantageous state. In a pachislot machine, when performing advantageous control for a player, the advantageous control may be performed after a predetermined number of games have been performed, instead of immediately performing the advantageous control. This predetermined number of games is called a so-called precursory game. In this modified example, for example, when a CT lottery is won during normal ART, a pachi-slot machine 1 that sandwiches a predetermined number of precursory games instead of immediately performing CT will be described.

As shown in FIG. 96 (A), during normal ART, CT lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination using the CT lottery table during ART (FIG. 61). If you win this CT lottery, it will shift to a state that is advantageous for the player called CT (additional chance zone), so until you win the CT, various lottery for CT lottery will be performed on the main side (main control board 71). .. Specifically, the main control board 71 performs an internal lottery to determine the internal winning combination, and also serves as the internal winning combination "F_certain chili lip", "F_1 certain chili lip", "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip". When any of "D" is determined, the flag conversion lottery is performed using the flag conversion lottery table during ART (FIG. 58).

On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modified example, the CT precursor after winning the CT lottery is the CT based on the role after the flag conversion lottery (that is, the role "triple chili lip" or the role "reach eye lip"). We will not perform lottery that gives benefits to players such as lottery. Then, during this CT precursor, the flag conversion lottery is performed on the sub side (sub-control board 72), and the notification content performed on the sub side is controlled based on the result of the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side. For example, when the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side is won, the information for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip" is displayed on the display unit 100, and when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the information is displayed. , Information for displaying the combination of the symbols of "Replay" is displayed on the display unit 100.

As described above, in recent pachislot machines, it is required to perform lottery that affects the profit (ball output) of the player on the main side, but in the pachislot machine 1 of this modified example, the lottery of the flag conversion lottery is performed. A period (during CT precursor) in which the result does not affect the profit of the player is provided, and the flag conversion lottery is performed on the sub side only during this period. This makes it possible to increase the chances of displaying a special combination of symbols called "reach eye lip" in a situation where the privilege of being in the CT precursor is decided, and the variation of how to show the combination of symbols increases. Therefore, improvement in playability can be expected.

Note that FIG. 96B is a flag conversion lottery table in the CT precursor used for the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side, and is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 82. The flag conversion lottery table in the CT precursor defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side in association with the internal winning combination. Looking at the flag conversion lottery table during the CT precursor, the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are converted to the role "reach eye lip" with a very high probability during the CT precursor. I understand. As a result, when the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are determined as the internal winning combination during the CT precursor, the combination of the symbols of "reach eye lip" is displayed with high probability. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that the player is in the midst of a sign. It should be noted that, once again, when the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side is won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip" is given, but the privilege is not given.

Of course, the flag conversion lottery during the CT precursor may be performed on the main side, but by performing the lottery on the sub side during a period that does not affect the interests of the player as in this modification, the main side It is suitable because it can reduce the data capacity and processing load.

<Another example of push order for triple chili lip display>
In the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, when the combinations "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination, if the correct answer is given in the pressing order, the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" is displayed. If the wrong answer is given in the order of pressing, the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed (Fig. 47). In addition, it is assumed that the correct push order for the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" is "forward push".

In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 of this modified example, when the combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination, the types of combinations of symbols displayed when the answer is incorrect are increased. , The order of pushing the correct answer is different for each of the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip".

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), in the pachislot machine 1 of this modified example, the correct answer for the combination "F_certain chili lip" is "forward push (the first stop operation is the left reel). 3L) ”, and the incorrect push order is“ middle push (first stop operation is middle reel 3C) ”and“ reverse push (first stop operation is right reel 3R) ”. Then, for the role "F_certain chili lip", the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" is displayed when it is pressed forward, and the combination of the symbols of "replay" is displayed when it is "middle pressed", and "reverse push". When "" is displayed, the combination of the symbols of "double chili lip" is displayed.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modified example, in the combination "F_1 certainty lip", the correct push order is "reverse push", and the incorrect push order is "forward push" and "middle push". And. Then, for the combination "F_1 certain chili lip", the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" is displayed when it is pushed backward, and the combination of the symbols of "replay" is displayed when it is "middle pressed", and "forward push". When "" is displayed, the combination of the symbols of "double chili lip" is displayed.

That is, in the pachislot machine 1 of this modified example, when any of the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, "forward push" is selected as the winning combination. "Triple chili lip" or "double chili lip" is displayed accordingly, and similarly, when "reverse push" is performed, "triple chili lip" or "double chili lip" is displayed depending on the type of winning combination. .. On the other hand, if any of the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, pressing "middle" will combine the symbols of "replay" regardless of the type of winning combination. Is displayed.

By doing so, for example, when the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination, various navigations (notifications) aiming at the chili symbol become possible. Specifically, both "navigation that aims at the chili symbol by pushing forward" and "navigation that aims at the chili symbol by pushing backward" can be performed. If the role "F_certain chili lip" is determined as the internal winning role, the "navigation that aims at the chili pattern by pushing forward" is a navigation for displaying "triple chili lip", and "reverse push". "Navi that aims at the chili pattern" is a navigation that does not display "triple chili lip" (double chili lip is displayed). On the contrary, when the role "F_1 certain chili lip" is decided as the internal winning role, "navigation that aims at the chili pattern by pushing forward" is a navigation for not displaying "triple chili lip", and "reverse". "Navigation that aims at the chili pattern by pushing" is a navigation for displaying "triple chili lip" (double chili lip is displayed).

In the pachislot machine 1 of this modification, whether or not to perform these navigations is managed by a flag conversion lottery performed on the main side, and navigation is performed under the control of the sub side based on the result of the flag conversion lottery on the main side. Is executed.

FIG. 97B is a diagram showing the relationship between the flag conversion lottery on the main side and the navigation on the sub side during normal ART. During normal ART, when the combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 performs a two-step flag conversion lottery (see FIG. 58). On the sub side, the result of the two-step flag conversion lottery is acquired from the start command data, and the navigation to be performed by the display unit 100 is determined based on the result of the two-step flag conversion lottery.

Specifically, when the flag conversion lottery of the two stages is not won at the time of the flag conversion lottery of the first stage, the sub-control board 72 performs "replay navigation". In this "replay navigation", the sub-control board 72 notifies the player to press the button in the middle. As shown in FIG. 97 (A), the combination of the symbols of "replay" is displayed at the time of middle pressing regardless of the combination "F_certain chili lip" or "F_1 certain chili lip".

Further, when the first-stage flag conversion lottery is won out of the two-stage flag conversion lottery and the second-stage flag conversion lottery is not won, the sub-control board 72 performs "chili lip fan navigation". In this "Chile Lip Fan Navi", the sub-control board 72 notifies that if the role "F_certain chili lip" is the internal winning role, push it backwards to aim at the chili pattern, and the role "F_1 certain chili lip" is inside. If it is a winning role, it will notify you to aim at the Chilean pattern by pushing forward. As shown in FIG. 97 (A), when the combination "F_certain chili lip" is pressed backward and when the combination "F_1 certain chili lip" is pressed forward, the combination of the symbols of "double chili lip" is displayed. Will be.

Further, when the flag conversion lottery of both the first stage and the second stage of the two-stage flag conversion lottery is won, the sub-control board 72 performs the "chili lip alignment navigation". In this "Chile Lip Matching Navi", the sub-control board 72 notifies that if the role "F_certain chili lip" is the internal winning role, push forward to aim at the chili pattern, and the role "F_1 certain chili lip" is inside. If it is a winning role, it will notify you to aim at the Chilean pattern by pushing it backwards. As shown in FIG. 97 (A), when the combination "F_certain chili lip" is pressed forward and when the combination "F_1 certain chili lip" is pressed backward, the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" is displayed. Will be.

As described above, the notification based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery does not affect the profit (although the flag conversion lottery itself affects the profit, the combination of symbols displayed as a result affects the profit. The notification based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery is not performed on the main side (instruction monitor), but only on the sub side (display unit 100). In this respect, as in this modified example, by performing not only "Chililip matching navigation" but also "Chilirip fanning navigation", navigation that does not affect profits can be performed in various ways on the sub side, which is interesting. Is improved.

[Effect of pachislot machine]
The pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. According to such a pachislot machine 1, the following effects can be expected.

(Management of duration during CT)
In the pachislot machine 1, CT is usually provided as an additional chance zone for extending the duration of ART, and the number of ART games is added based on the internal winning combination during this CT. CT is performed by eight games in one set, but if the number of ART games can be added during CT, the number of games is not subtracted, and if the number of games cannot be added, the number of games is subtracted. .. For the player, it is not possible to know how long the CT will last, and as long as the addition is performed, the CT will not end, so that the interest of the game during the CT can be enhanced.

At this time, in the pachi-slot machine 1, if the addition is performed according to the combination “triple chili lip” during CT, the game is reset eight times in one set. As a result, even if the CT is just before the end, the CT will be restarted from the beginning by adding according to the role "triple chili lip", so there is a strong interest in the game during the CT. It is possible to continue the game without getting bored by holding it, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during CT.

In addition, the addition according to the role "triple chili lip" is performed only when the role "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are decided as the internal winning combination and the flag conversion lottery is won. It is possible to prevent an excessive profit from being given to the player, and to balance the profits of the player and the game store. In the pachislot machine 1 described above, it is assumed that the flag conversion lottery for the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" is always won during CT (see FIG. 65), but the winning probability is only an example. It does not prevent the player and the game store from taking appropriate measures according to the balance of profits.

(Number of additional games based on the role "Triple Chili Lip" in CT)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the number of additions based on the role "triple chili lip" exceeds a certain number of times during CT, the number of games to be added per one time is increased. As mentioned above, as long as the number of ART games is added, the CT will not end, and if the role "triple chili lip" is won, the CT will be reset. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the CT It is possible to expect that the amount of addition per time will increase as the number of times continues, and the interest during CT will improve. In addition, since the number of times that triggers the increase in the amount of addition per time is more than the number of games (8 times) for one set of CT (9 times or more), an excessive profit is given to the player. It is possible to prevent the giving, and to balance the profits of the player and the game store.

(Bonus notification performed on the main side)
Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation for displaying the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination related to the bonus of "10" (or "11") on the instruction monitor of the information display 14. By displaying, the bonus notification is performed on the main side. Here, the pachislot machine usually has a priority of the symbols to be drawn in, and when the combination related to the bonus and the other combination are determined as the internal winning combination, the combination related to the bonus is determined by the priority. It may or may not be possible to pull in the combination of symbols according to the situation.

In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the combination related to the bonus and any of "missing", "F_special role 1", "F_special role 2", and "F_special role 3" are determined as the internal winning combination. In some cases, a combination of symbols according to the winning combination of bonuses can be drawn in, but if other winning combinations are determined as internal winning combinations, a combination of symbols according to the winning combination of bonuses should be drawn in. I can't. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, the instruction is given only when the bonus-related combination and any of "missing", "F_special role 1", "F_special role 2", and "F_special role 3" are determined as the internal winning combination. Display "10" (or "11") on the monitor. As a result, the navigation on the main side can be performed at an appropriate timing in which the winning combination related to the bonus can be won.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1, even if the bonus-related role and any of "missing", "F_special role 1", "F_special role 2", and "F_special role 3" are determined as internal winning roles, the bonus is related. The instruction monitor does not display "10" (or "11") until the predetermined number of games has elapsed since the winning combination was first won, and the instruction monitor is provided on the condition that the predetermined number of games have elapsed. Is displayed as "10" (or "11").

For example, a production that is performed over a plurality of games (so-called continuous production) may be performed by winning a role related to a bonus, and during this continuous production, "10" (or "10" (or "or" If it is displayed as 11 "), the meaning of the continuous production will be diminished, and there is a possibility that the interest will be spoiled. In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display on the instruction monitor is not performed until the predetermined number of games have elapsed, and the display is performed on the instruction monitor after the predetermined number of games have elapsed. Bonus notification can be performed on the main side without any loss.

(Notification performed on the main / sub side and notification performed on the sub side alone)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a plurality of types of combinations having different combinations of symbols displayed according to the mode (pushing order) of the stop operation are provided (see FIG. 47), and the symbols to be displayed are provided for these plurality of types of combinations. A combination of granting different benefits depending on the combination of the above and a combination of granting the same privilege even if the combination of displayed symbols is different are included.

For example, the number of medals to be paid out differs depending on whether the combination of "bell" symbols is displayed or the combination of "bell spilled eyes" symbols is displayed, and the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed. Since the combination of the symbols of "RT2 transition lip" is displayed and the combination of the symbols of "RT2 transition lip" is displayed, it is different whether or not the transition of the RT game state is performed in addition to the operation of the re-game. The combination "F_maintenance lip_1st" is a combination that gives different benefits depending on the combination of displayed symbols. On the other hand, when the combination of the symbols of "Triple Chili Lip" is displayed and the combination of the symbols of "Replay" is displayed, the replay operation is only performed in both cases. "Kakuchiririp" is a role that grants the same privilege even if the combination of displayed symbols is different (Note that the role "F_Karichirip" is a role that gives different benefits depending on the result of the flag conversion lottery. , The combination of displayed symbols does not affect the benefits granted).

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the combination of giving different benefits depending on the combination of displayed symbols is notified on both the main and sub sides, but is the same even if the combination of displayed symbols is different. The combination of giving the privilege of is not notified by the instruction monitor on the main side, but is notified only by the display unit 100 on the sub side. As a result, the notification that affects the privilege can be appropriately performed by the instruction monitor on the main side that manages the privilege, and the notification that does not affect the privilege can be performed by the display unit 100 on the sub side in various ways. ..

(Notification lottery on the sub side)
In addition, since the notification on the sub side at the time of winning the role "F_certain chili lip" is performed based on the result of the flag conversion lottery performed on the main side, the lottery (notification lottery) as to whether or not to perform the notification is performed on the main side. It is managed by. That is, when the winning combination "F_certain chili lip" is won, the privilege to be given differs depending on the result of the flag conversion lottery. Therefore, the flag conversion lottery is a lottery that affects the privilege and is strictly managed on the main side.

On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the notification as a directing may be performed completely without affecting the privilege to be given. In such a case, the notification lottery itself as to whether or not to perform the notification itself. On the sub side. For example, during the CT omen, it is already decided to give the privilege of CT, and it is possible to increase the chances of displaying a special combination of symbols called "reach eye lip" (on the contrary, even though the privilege is not given). If it is displayed, it will give the player a feeling of dissatisfaction, so it cannot be displayed).

Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, when the role "F_reach eye lip A to D" is won during the CT precursor, the flag conversion lottery is performed on the sub side, and the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip" is selected based on the lottery result. Notify for display. As a result, in a situation where the privilege of being in the CT precursor is decided, the variation of how to show the combination of symbols increases, so that the playability can be expected to be improved. Further, it is preferable that the data capacity and the processing load on the main side can be reduced by performing the notification lottery (flag conversion lottery) on the sub side during the period that does not affect the privilege.

(How to display the game history)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a first sub-display device 201 is provided separately from the display unit 100, and various information useful to the player is displayed on the first sub-display device 201. For example, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a top screen 211 showing an outline game history on the first sub-display device 201, a menu screen 212 capable of performing various operations on the pachi-slot machine 1, and game information screens 213,214 showing detailed game history. , 215 are displayed. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 registers a player who plays a game and provides a service peculiar to the player. For example, when the registration of the player is not accepted, the registration of the player is accepted although the game information screens 213, 214, 215 showing the detailed game history cannot be displayed on the first sub display device 201. In this case, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 showing the detailed game history are controlled so that they can be displayed on the first sub-display device 201. Since confirming a more detailed game history leads to an improvement in the convenience of the player, the pachislot machine 1 can improve the convenience when the registration of the player is accepted.

Here, the first sub-display device 201 is provided separately from the display unit 100 that performs the effect, and the sub-control board 72 is the first sub-display device 201 (and) via a liquid crystal relay circuit (not shown). Since the second sub-display device 202) is controlled and the display unit 100 is controlled via the accessory relay board (not shown), the first sub-display device 201 can be controlled separately from the display unit 100. .. Specifically, the display of the first sub-display device 201 can be switched even during the game (that is, the effect is being executed by the display unit 100). From the viewpoint of the player, by switching the display of the first sub-display device 201 during the game, various information can be acquired without disturbing the effect being executed by the display unit 100, which is preferable.

In particular, as in the display unit 100 of the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by switching a plurality of screen mechanisms for displaying an image by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B, an effect using a flat image display is used. , When performing an effect using a video display with a sense of depth (three-dimensional effect) and an effect using a curved image display, the effect of the effect can be significantly enhanced, but during the effect, the effect such as the game history can be obtained. Is not suitable for displaying irrelevant information. In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, information unrelated to these effects is displayed on the first sub-display device 201 provided separately from the display unit 100, so that the effect is not impaired. Moreover, various information such as game history can be appropriately displayed.

By the way, in general, in a pachislot machine, a medal slot is provided on the right side when viewed from the player on the pedestal, and a bet button and a start lever are provided on the left side when viewed from the player. The player operates the right side or the left side (side) of the pedestal portion.

In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the first sub-display device 201 is provided on the side (right side or left side) of the surface that stands substantially vertically from the pedestal portion 10, and the first sub-display device 201 is displayed on the screen of the first sub-display device 201. A touch sensor 201a for switching the display of the sub display device 201 is provided. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the first sub-display device 201 and the input device (touch sensor 201a) for controlling the display are provided at a place where the player's hand is located during the game, and the operability of the player Is improved. In particular, since the first sub-display device 201 with the touch sensor 201a is provided on the surface of the pedestal portion 10 that stands upright from the horizontal plane, the player can display the first sub-display while placing his / her hand on the pedestal portion 10. The device 201 can be operated, which not only improves the operability but also reduces the fatigue associated with the operation, so that the operating rate can be expected to be improved.

[Second Embodiment]
Subsequently, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 109. The same configuration and control as the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment will not be described in detail.

[Game flow of the pachislot machine of the second embodiment]
First, the game flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence / absence of notification of the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment. Comparing the transition flow of the gaming state of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 98 and the transition flow of the gaming state of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 33, basically, the first embodiment and the second embodiment are basically. The game is played in the same flow, but the game is played in a different flow during the ART game state. That is, the control of CT during the ART gaming state is significantly different between the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment and the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment.

Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, a CT lottery is normally performed during ART based on an internal winning combination, and when the CT lottery is won, the gaming state is shifted to CT. On the other hand, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that the area between the MB flags in the ART gaming state is CT. The MB (combination "F_MB") is a continuous differential device related to a so-called second-class special accessory, and in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the MB is used as an internal winning combination in the main control board 71. Once determined, it is carried over as an internal winning combination over multiple games until the corresponding symbol combination (combination "C_MB") is displayed along the valid line.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, the MB non-flags in the ART gaming state are set as normal ART, and CT is performed between the MB flags in the ART gaming state. That is, in the second embodiment, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state between the MB flags when (H) MB is determined as an internal winning combination during normal ART. The game is performed so that the combination of symbols related to the MB is not displayed between the MB flags in the ART game state, and the main control board 71 performs CT during this period. It should be noted that a method of playing a game so that a combination of symbols corresponding to MB is not displayed between the MB flags is already well known. For example, a symbol that does not display a combination of symbols corresponding to MB is aimed at. This can be achieved by notifying and notifying the push order in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the MB is not displayed.

On the other hand, when the CT is completed, the winning of the MB is prompted (notified), and (I) when the combination of symbols corresponding to the MB is displayed, the gaming state shifts from between the MB flags to the MB gaming state. After that, when the end condition of (J) MB game state is satisfied, the game state shifts from the MB game state to the MB non-flag, and normal ART is performed.

<Characteristics of CT performed during the MB flag>
Since the MB is carried over as an internal winning combination during the MB flag, stop control different from that during the MB non-flag can be performed. For example, if the predetermined small winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination between the MB flags and the non-flags, the internal winning combination is "MB + predetermined small winning combination" because the MB is carried over during the MB flags. Although it is a "role", the internal winning combination is only a "predetermined small combination" because the MB is not carried over during the MB non-flag. Since the pachislot machine performs stop control based on the internal winning combination, different stop control is performed between the MB flag and the MB non-flag even if the same predetermined small combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Stop control can be performed based on the information, and as a result, the combination of symbols that can be displayed for a predetermined small winning combination can be different between the MB flag and the MB non-flag.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, it is difficult (or impossible to display) to display during normal ART (during MB non-flag) by making the stop control different between the MB flag and the MB non-flag. By displaying the combination of symbols during CT (between the MB flags), various playability is realized. Hereinafter, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be specifically described while paying attention to the differences from the first embodiment.

[Correspondence between winning role and stop symbol]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100, the relationship between the internal winning combination in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment and the combination of the displayed symbols will be described. Since the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment and the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment have different types of roles and combinations of symbols, this point will be described first.

(Type of role used in the second embodiment)
In the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the roles "F_chili lip", "F_certain chili lip", "F_1 certain chili lip", "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are used. On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combinations "R_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" are used instead of these combinations.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the combinations "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd" are used. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combinations "F_pushing order bell 1" to "F_pushing order bell 6" are used instead of these combinations. In the following, the combinations "F_pushing order bell 1" to "F_pushing order bell 6" may be simply referred to as "pushing order bell". Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, a combination (combination "F_MB") related to MB that the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment does not have is used. The other roles may be common to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, or may be different from each other, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

(Type of combination of symbols used in the second embodiment)
In the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, a combination of "bell", "bell spilled eyes", and "first piece" is used as a combination of symbols corresponding to the roles "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd". I was using it. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, as a combination of symbols corresponding to the combinations "F_pushing order bell 1" to "F_pushing order bell 6", in addition to the combination of these symbols, "MB" Use a combination of "cactus" symbols. The combination of "MB" symbols may be arbitrary. Further, the combination of the "cactus" symbols may be the same as that of the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, but the number of medals to be paid out when displayed is the same as the combination of the "bell" symbols (9). Sheet).

<Correspondence between winning combination and stop symbol during MB non-flag>
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing the relationship between the internal winning combination and the combination of displayed symbols during the MB non-flags. As shown in FIG. 99, the combinations "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and the pressing order is "F_single chili lip 4". In the case of "forward push", the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed along the effective line. On the other hand, if the push order is other than "forward push", the combination of "chili lip" symbols is displayed along the valid line in the correct push order, and the "replay" symbol combination is displayed in the incorrect push order. Is displayed.

More specifically, in the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4", in the case of the correct push order for each role, the combination of the symbols of "single chili lip" is displayed, and each of them is displayed. In the case of incorrect answer push order for each role, the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed. In addition, in the roles "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4", in the case of the correct push order for each role, the combination of the symbols of "double chili lip" is displayed, and for each role. In the case of incorrect answer push order, the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed. In addition, in the roles "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4", in the case of the correct push order for each role, the combination of the symbols of "3 consecutive chili lip" is displayed, and for each role. In the case of incorrect answer push order, the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed.

In addition, during the MB non-flags, the combinations "F_pushing order bell 1" to "F_pushing order bell 6" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and the correct answer is for each combination. In the case of push order, the combination of "bell" symbols is displayed, and in the case of incorrect push order for each role, the combination of "bell spilled eyes" or "first piece" symbols is displayed. Is displayed.

<Correspondence between winning combination and stop symbol during MB flag>
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing the relationship between the internal winning combination between the MB flags and the combination of displayed symbols. As shown in FIG. 100, in the interval between the MB flags, in the combinations "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4", the combination of the symbols of "chili lip" is displayed along the effective line regardless of the pressing order. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when any of the combination "F_MB" and the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination, "chili lip" is always used. The combination of symbols is displayed along the effective line.

More specifically, in the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4", the combination of the symbols of "single chili lip" is displayed along the effective line regardless of the pressing order, and the combination "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" is displayed. ~ In "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4", the combination of the symbols of "2 consecutive chili lip" is displayed along the effective line regardless of the pressing order, and in the roles "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" The combination of the symbols of "Triple Chili Lip" is displayed along the effective line.

Comparing FIGS. 99 and 100, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combinations "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_triple chili lip 4" are displayed according to the pressing order during the MB non-flag. While the combination is different, it does not affect the combination of symbols whose push order is displayed during the MB flag.

Further, among the MB flags, the combinations "F_pushing order bell 1" to "F_pushing order bell 6" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and are determined for each combination. The combination of "bell", "bell spilled or first piece", "cactus", and "MB" is displayed according to the pressing order. Comparing FIGS. 99 and 100, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, more kinds of symbol combinations are displayed during the MB flag than during the MB non-flag when the winning combination “push order bell” is won. be able to. Specifically, the combination of "bell", "bell spilled eyes or the first piece" is displayed according to the pressing order during the MB non-flags, while it is displayed according to the pressing order during the MB flags. The combination of the symbols of "bell", "cactus", "MB", "bell spilled eye or first piece" is displayed.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" and the roles "F_push order bell 1" to "F_push order bell 6" during the MB flag The stop control for the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" and the stop control for the combination "F_push order bell 1" to "F_push order bell 6" are different.

[Flow of games during normal ART]
Subsequently, the flow of the game during the normal ART of the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combinations of the symbols displayed in the combinations "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_triple chili lip 4" are different depending on the pressing order. In the pachislot machine 1, when the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" are determined as internal winning roles during normal ART, a flag conversion lottery is performed, and when this flag conversion lottery is won, "chili lip" is performed. In addition to notifying the display of the combination of symbols of, the number of ART games is added. On the contrary, if the flag conversion lottery is not won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay" is performed without adding the number of ART games.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the additional amount of the number of ART games when the flag conversion lottery is won is determined based on the type of the combination determined as the internal winning combination. Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1, when the internal winning combination when winning the flag conversion lottery is the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4", the smallest additional amount is determined and the combination Determine the next smallest additional amount in the case of "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4", and determine the largest additional amount in the case of the combination "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4". To do. As described above, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a notification is given to display the combination of the "Chile Lip" symbols. Therefore, for the player, the more Chile symbols are displayed, the larger the amount to be added. Become.

[Data table during normal ART]
Subsequently, the data table normally used during ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102. The data tables shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 are stored in the main ROM 32 of the main control board 71.

<Flag conversion lottery table during ART>
FIG. 101 is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for the flag conversion lottery performed during the normal ART of the second embodiment. The flag conversion lottery table during ART defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination, the ART level, and the lottery state. The ART level is information controlled in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the lottery state is information controlled in the same manner as in the CT lottery state in the first embodiment.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, whether the main control board 71 converts the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" into the combination "chili lip" by using the flag conversion lottery table during ART. Whether or not to draw (flag conversion lottery). Then, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the sub-control board 72 notifies the correct pressing order for each winning combination via the display unit 100, and when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the sub-control board 72 notifies the winning order. The sub-control board 72 notifies the wrong answer pressing order for each winning combination via the display unit 100.

<Additional lottery table during normal ART>
Subsequently, FIG. 102 is an additional lottery table during the normal ART used for the additional lottery for adding the number of ART games performed during the normal ART of the second embodiment. Normally, the additional lottery table during ART defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the main control board 71 wins the flag conversion lottery, the additional lottery is performed using the additional lottery table during the normal ART, and when the additional lottery is won, the corresponding additional lottery is performed. The number of additional games is added (added to the ART end game number counter). In addition, the information of the lottery value associated with the winning combination "single chili lip" in the figure is that the internal winning combination at the time of winning the flag conversion lottery is the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4". The lottery value information associated with the winning combination "double chili lip" is referred to in the case, and the internal winning combination at the time of winning the flag conversion lottery is the role "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4". The lottery value information that is referred to in a certain case and is associated with the winning combination "triple chili lip" is that the internal winning combination when winning the flag conversion lottery is the role "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4". Referenced when is.

[Flow of games during CT]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 103, the flow of the game during CT of the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is significantly different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in the management method of the duration of CT. As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the main control board 71 manages the duration of CT by playing eight times in one set, but in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 is used. The control board 71 has a CT duration based on the number of medals paid out during CT (more specifically, the so-called “difference number” obtained by subtracting the “number of medals used for the game” from the “number of medals paid out”). To manage.

Specifically, the main control board 71 ends the CT when the difference number of sheets in the CT reaches the end number (50 sheets) (for example, notifies to win the MB when the winning combination "pushing order bell" is won. ). Here, when the combination of the "bell" and "cactus" symbols is displayed, nine medals are paid out, so when the combination of the "bell" symbols is displayed during CT (more specifically, CT). If the flag conversion lottery is not won during the process), the difference number (6 sheets) for which the duration of CT has increased is consumed. On the other hand, when a combination of "cactus" symbols is displayed during CT (more specifically, when a flag conversion lottery is won during CT), the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment has Maintain the duration of CT.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 103 (A), the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery when the winning combination "pushing order bell" is determined as the internal winning combination during CT. When the flag conversion lottery is won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display a combination of "cactus" symbols for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. When notified and the flag conversion lottery is not won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display a combination of "bell" symbols for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Notify the push order.

Then, when the combination of the symbols of "bell" or "cactus" is displayed, the main control board 71 increases the number of difference sheets by 6, and the duration of CT is exhausted, but the flag conversion lottery is won. If so, the main control board 71 adds 6 to not only the difference number but also the end number of CT. As a result, although the difference in the number of sheets during CT increased by 6 due to the display of the combination of the symbols of "cactus", the number of sheets at the end of CT also increased by 6, so if the flag conversion lottery is won, CT The duration of will be maintained.

The flag conversion lottery is performed based on the value of the CT meter. That is, as shown in FIG. 103 (A), the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment is provided with a plurality of stages of CT meters from "1" to "MAX", and the lower the CT meter, the more the flag conversion lottery is won. The probability is lowered, and the higher the CT meter, the higher the probability of winning the flag conversion lottery.

This CT meter is promoted or demoted based on the result of the game during CT. That is, the main control board 71 promotes the CT meter with a predetermined probability when the combination “F_single chili lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chili lip 4” is determined as the internal winning combination during CT. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), the main control board 71 is the lowest when the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination during CT. If the CT meter is promoted with a probability and the roles "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4" are determined as internal winning roles during CT, the CT meter is promoted with the next lowest probability and the role is used during CT. When "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" are determined as internal winning combinations, the CT meter is promoted with the highest probability.

Further, if the main control board 71 does not win the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning the winning combination "pushing order bell" during CT, the CT meter is demoted. In the case where the flag conversion lottery is not won, the main control board 71 may demote the CT meter with a predetermined probability, or may always demote the CT meter.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" are determined as internal winning roles during CT, the number of ART games is added. The amount of additional ART games varies depending on the number of displayed dust symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 103 (C), the main control board 71 is used during CT to serve as "F_single dust lip 1". "-" F_single chili lip 4 "is determined as the internal winning combination, the minimum amount of addition is determined, and the roles" F_2 consecutive chili lip 1 "to" F_2 consecutive chili lip 4 "are determined as the internal winning combination during CT. And the next smallest additional amount is determined, and when the combination "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination during CT, the largest additional amount is determined.

[Data table during CT]
Subsequently, the data table used during CT will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 106. The data tables shown in FIGS. 104 to 106 are stored in the main ROM 32 of the main control board 71.

<Flag conversion lottery table during CT>
FIG. 104 is a CT flag conversion lottery table used for the flag conversion lottery performed during CT of the second embodiment. The flag conversion lottery table during CT defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination and the CT meter.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 converts the combinations “F_pushing order bell 1” to “F_pushing order bell 6” into “cactus” by using the flag conversion lottery table during ART. Whether or not it is drawn (flag conversion lottery). Then, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display a combination of "cactus" symbols for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. When the pressing order is notified and the flag conversion lottery is not won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 combine the symbols of "bell" for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Notifies the pressing order for displaying.

Here, referring to FIG. 104, it can be seen that the higher the value of the CT meter, the easier it is to win the flag conversion lottery during CT, and when the CT meter is "MAX", the flag conversion lottery is always won. You can see that. If the flag conversion lottery is won, the duration of CT is maintained. Therefore, when the CT meter is "MAX", CT continues without ending. If the CT is not completed, the profit given to the player will be excessive. Therefore, when the CT meter reaches "MAX", the CT meter may be demoted at a predetermined timing, and the upper limit of the number of completed CT meters may be used. It may be provided, or both the demotion of the CT meter and the upper limit of the number of finished sheets may be applied.

When demoting a CT meter, if it is demoted immediately after being promoted to "MAX", the interest of the player will be impaired. Therefore, the CT meter may be demoted at a predetermined timing after the CT meter reaches "MAX". Here, since the CT meter is provided in eight stages from "1" to "MAX", for example, the CT meter is demoted after eight games have been performed since the CT meter became "MAX". Alternatively, the CT meter may be demoted after the flag conversion lottery has been performed eight times after the CT meter has reached "MAX". Further, the value of the CT meter after demotion is arbitrary, for example, it may be demoted to the CT meter "1", it may be demoted to the CT meter "7", and the CT meter "1" may be demoted. The value of the demoted destination may be determined by lottery from among "7".

<CT meter promotion lottery table during CT>
FIG. 105 is a CT meter promotion lottery table during CT used for the promotion lottery of the CT meter performed during CT of the second embodiment. The CT meter promotion lottery table during CT defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the promotion lottery of the CT meter in association with the current CT meter value and the internal winning combination.

With reference to FIG. 105, the probability of winning the promotion lottery of the CT meter is the lowest for the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4", and the roles "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4". It can be seen that the next lowest is the combination "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4". In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the CT meter is promoted one step at a time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of steps may be promoted at one time.

<Additional lottery table during CT>
Subsequently, FIG. 106 is an additional lottery table during CT used for an additional lottery for adding the number of ART games performed during the CT of the second embodiment. The additional lottery table during CT defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 performs an additional lottery using the additional lottery table during CT, and when the additional lottery is won, the corresponding number of additional games is added (ART end). Add to the game counter).

With reference to FIG. 106, the additional amount of the number of ART games during CT is the smallest for the roles “F_single chili lip 1” to “F_single chili lip 4”, and the roles “F_2 consecutive chili lip 1” to “F_2 consecutive chili lip 4”. It can be seen that the number of roles is the second lowest, and the roles "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" are the most. More specifically, in the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4" in which one chili symbol is displayed, the number of ART games of 10 games or more is added, and two chili symbols are displayed. In "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4", the number of ART games of 20 games or more is added, and in the role "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" in which three chili symbols are displayed, The number of ART games of 30 games or more will be added. That is, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the number of ART games is added according to the number of Chilean symbols displayed during CT.

[Flow of games during CZ]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 107, the flow of the game in the CZ of the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. The pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment has CZs 1, 2, and 3 as CZs as in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment. In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the game flow of CZ3 is the same as that of the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, but the game flow of CZ1 and 2 is different from that of the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment. different.

Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, CZ1 and 2 are divided into a first half part and a second half part, and ranks (modes and points) having different expectations for winning an ART lottery are promoted in the first half part. In the latter half, the lottery result of the ART lottery based on the rank is notified by the battle effect (see FIG. 50). As shown in FIG. 107, the basic flow in such CZs 1 and 2 is the same in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment.

On the other hand, the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment is significantly different from the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment in the termination conditions of the first half. That is, in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the first half of CZ1 and 2 is terminated based on the number of continuous games, but in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the CZ1 is the first half based on the number of continuous games. The part is finished, but CZ2 finishes the first half part based on the result of the end lottery. Further, both CZ1 and CZ1 and 2 perform a lock lottery in the first half, and even if the lock lottery is won, the first half of CZ1 and 2 is terminated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 107 (A), in the first half of CZ1, the main control board 71 performs a rank-up lottery every game. Since this rank-up lottery is the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIG. 53), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the first half of the CZ1, the main control board 71 performs a lock lottery every game. This lock lottery is a process of drawing whether or not to perform a game lock based on the internal winning combination. Then, when the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, it terminates the first half of the CZ1 and locks the game (for example, delays the start of rotation at the start of reel rotation). On the other hand, in the case of non-winning of the lock lottery, the main control board 71 does not end the first half of the CZ1 and continues the first half of the CZ1 until the first half of the CZ1 has passed 15 games.

Then, when the first half of the CZ1 has passed 15 games or won the lock lottery, the main control board 71 ends the first half of the CZ1 and shifts to the second half. In the latter half of CZ1, the main control board 71 performs ART lottery based on the rank obtained as a result of the rank-up lottery in the first half. Since this ART lottery is the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 55 (A) and 55 (C)), detailed description thereof will be omitted. However, when the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, Be sure to win the ART lottery. If the ART lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts to the normal gaming state, and if the ART lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts to the ART gaming state via ART preparation. ..

On the other hand, in the first half of CZ2, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), the main control board 71 performs a rank-up lottery every game. Since this rank-up lottery is the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIG. 54), detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the main control board 71 performs an end lottery for each game in the first half of the CZ1, and when the end lottery is won, the first half of the CZ1 is ended and the latter half is moved to the end lottery, but the end lottery is not performed. In the case of winning, the first half of CZ1 is continued.

Further, in the first half of the CZ2, the main control board 71 performs a lock lottery every game. Then, when the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, the first half of the CZ2 is terminated and the game is locked. On the other hand, in the case where the lock lottery is not won, the main control board 71 does not end the first half of the CZ2, but continues the first half of the CZ2 until the end lottery is won.

Then, when the main control board 71 wins the end lottery or the lock lottery, the main control board 71 ends the first half portion of the CZ2 and shifts to the second half portion. In the latter half of the CZ2, the main control board 71 performs an ART lottery based on the rank obtained as a result of the rank-up lottery in the first half. Since this ART lottery is also the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 55 (B) and 55 (C)), detailed description thereof will be omitted. However, when the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, Be sure to win the ART lottery. If the ART lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts to the normal gaming state, and if the ART lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts to the ART gaming state via ART preparation. ..

As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that the lock lottery is performed every game in the first half of the CZ1 and CZ1 and 2. Further, the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment is different from the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that the end condition of the first half of the CZ2 is not the number of continuous games but the end lottery.

[Data table in CZ]
Subsequently, the data table used in CZ will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. The data tables shown in FIGS. 108 and 109 are stored in the main ROM 32 of the main control board 71.

<CZ2 end lottery table>
FIG. 108 is a CZ2 end lottery table used for the end lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 of the second embodiment. The CZ2 end lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the end lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

With reference to FIG. 108, in the first half of CZ2 of the second embodiment, when the combination "replay" is determined as the internal winning combination, the end lottery is performed, and the end lottery can be won with high probability. I understand. Since CZ2 is basically performed during the RT0 to RT3 gaming states, the combination "replay" is any of the combination "F_maintenance lip A" to "F_RT4 lip_3rd". In the pachislot machine, the replay is determined as an internal winning combination with a probability of at least a predetermined value (about 1 / 7.3) or more. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the first half of the CZ2 may end. It turns out that it happens relatively frequently.

<Lock lottery table>
Subsequently, FIG. 109 is a lock lottery table used for the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1 and 2 of the second embodiment, and FIG. 109 (A) is a lock lottery table used for the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1. FIG. 109 (B) is a lock lottery table used for the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ2. The lock lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the lock lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

Comparing FIGS. 109 (A) and 109 (B), it can be seen that the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 has a higher probability of winning than the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the first half of CZ1 ends when the predetermined number of games (15 games) elapses, while the first half of CZ2 ends when the end lottery is won. Further, in the first half of CZ1 and 2, a rank-up lottery is performed, and when the first half of CZ1, 2 is completed, an ART lottery is performed based on the result of this rank-up lottery. Therefore, it can be said that CZ1 is a chance zone in which the timing of ART lottery is fixed, and CZ2 is a chance zone in which the timing of ART lottery is indefinite.

In addition, since the end lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 is performed when the winning combination "replay" is determined as the internal winning combination with a relatively high probability, the rank-up lottery is performed during CZ2 as compared with that during CZ1. It is easy to receive less chance. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the lock lottery is performed in the first half of the CZ1 and 2, and the probability of winning the lock lottery is higher in the CZ2 than in the CZ1. As a result, even CZ2, which tends to receive less chance of receiving a rank-up lottery, can be expected to shift to ART.

[Modified example of the second embodiment]
The pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment has been described above. Subsequently, a modified example of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described.

<CT precursor game and notification lottery>
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment described above, in order to facilitate understanding, when shifting between the MB flags during normal ART, it is decided to immediately shift to CT from the next game, but shifting between the MB flags. After that, a predetermined number of precursor games may be inserted.

As shown in FIG. 110 (A), when the MB is normally determined as the internal winning combination during ART, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from between the MB non-flags and between the MB flags. During normal ART (between MB non-flags), the number of ART games will be added if the role "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is won in the flag conversion lottery (see FIG. 102). The flag conversion lottery until the transition between the MB flags is performed is performed on the main side (main control board 71) because it affects the privilege given to the player.

Here, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combination of the symbols of "chili lip" is always displayed regardless of the pressing order between the MB flags. Therefore, if it is decided to perform the precursory game between the MB flags, From the stop control (combination of displayed symbols), the player may know that the precursor game is in progress. For example, as shown in FIG. 99, during the MB non-flag, the combination of the symbols of "chili lip" is not displayed by pressing forward when the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is won. , When the combination of the symbols of "Chililip" is displayed by pressing forward, the player knows that it is during the MB flag (during the precursory game).

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modified example, when the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination during the MB flag, the push order is intentionally notified. As described above, when the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination during the MB flag, the combination of the symbols of "chili lip" is displayed regardless of the pressing order. However, when the push order is notified, the player recognizes that the combination of the "chili lip" symbols is displayed according to the notified push order, and the player is in the middle of the MB flags. It can be difficult to grasp.

Since such notification of the push order does not affect the profit of the player in any way, in the pachislot machine 1 of this modified example, a lottery (notification) as to whether or not to notify the push order during the MB flag is drawn. Lottery) is performed on the sub (sub control board 72) side. Of course, the notification lottery between the MB flags may be performed on the main side, but by performing the lottery that does not affect the profit of the player as in this modification on the sub side, the data capacity on the main side It is suitable because it can reduce the processing load.

FIG. 110B is a notification lottery table in the CT precursor used for the notification lottery performed on the sub side, and is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 82. The notification lottery table in the CT precursor defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the notification lottery performed on the sub side in association with the internal winning combination.

When the notification lottery using the notification lottery table in the CT precursor is won, the sub-control board 72 notifies an arbitrary push order other than the forward push via the display unit 100.

<Navigation when the push order bell between MB flags is won>
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment described above, when the winning combination "pushing order bell" is won during the MB flag, more kinds of symbol combinations are displayed than during the MB non-flag. Specifically, while the MB non-flags are displayed, the combination of "bell" and "bell spilled eyes or the first sheet" is displayed according to the pressing order, while during the MB flags, "bell" is displayed according to the pressing order. The combination of the symbols of "bell", "cactus", "MB", "bell spilled eye or first piece" is displayed. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the pressing order required to display the combination of "cactus" symbols that can be displayed only between the MB flags is notified during the CT between the MB flags. ..

In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modified example, when the winning combination "pushing order bell" is won between the MB flags, the notification content is changed according to the state until the start of the MB.

Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when MB is normally determined as an internal winning combination during ART, the gaming state shifts between the MB flags, and then CT is performed. In this case, in the pachi-slot machine 1 that sandwiches a predetermined number of precursor games after shifting between the MB flags, the states during the MB flags are divided into a “precursor game” state, a “CT” state, and a “MB waiting” state. be able to.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 111, when the MB is hit during the normal ART, the state becomes a "precursor game" between the MB flags, and then a predetermined number of premonition games are performed and the CT is started. It goes into the "CT" state during the MB flag, and then goes into the "MB waiting" state until the MB wins when the CT ends.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modified example, the notification content at the time of winning the combination "pushing order bell" is different depending on the state between these MB flags. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111, in the "precursor game" state, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display a combination of "bell" symbols via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Notify the push order. Further, in the "CT" state, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the pressing order in which the combination of the "bell" or "cactus" symbols is displayed via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. That is, in the "CT" state, the push order corresponding to either "bell" or "cactus" is notified based on the result of the flag conversion lottery based on the CT meter as described above.

In the "MB standby" state after the CT is completed, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 may notify the arbitrary combination of symbols via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. For example, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 may notify the push order in which the combination of the “bell” symbols is displayed, or the push order in which the combination of the “cactus” symbols is displayed. It may be notified, or it may be notified of the pressing order in which the combination of "MB" symbols is displayed.

On the other hand, since the combination of the "cactus" symbols cannot be displayed during normal ART, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the pressing order in which the combination of the "bell" symbols is displayed.

[Effect of the pachislot machine of the second embodiment]
The second embodiment of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. According to such a pachislot machine 1, the following effects can be expected.

(Combination of symbols that can be displayed between the MB flags)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, more kinds of symbol combinations can be displayed during the MB flag interval than during the MB non-flag interval when the winning combination “push order bell” is won. Specifically, the combination of "bell", "bell spilled eyes or the first piece" is displayed according to the pressing order between the MB non-flags, while it is displayed according to the pressing order during the MB flags. The combination of the symbols of "bell", "cactus", "MB", "bell spilled eye or first piece" is displayed.

As a result, it is possible to increase the types of combinations of symbols displayed between the MB flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and it is possible to give diversity to the games between the MB flags. Specifically, it is now possible to display a combination of "cactus" symbols corresponding to the so-called rare role between the MB flags, and the appearance frequency of the rare role without changing the type of winning role and the winning probability. Can be enhanced. In particular, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, since the combination of the symbols displayed at the time of winning the combination "pushing order bell" is changed, it is possible to increase the frequency of appearance of the rare combination with the payout of medals.

If the combination of "cactus" symbols is continuously displayed between the MB flags, it will be known that the combination is between the MB flags. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, only when the flag conversion lottery is won, the combination of the "cactus" symbols is notified, and in the case of non-winning, the combination of the "bell" symbols is notified. This makes it difficult for the player to understand the current state, which is preferable. In addition, by controlling the notification content by the flag conversion lottery, the frequency of the symbol combination (rare role) of the "cactus" between the MB flags can be adjusted, and the playability between the MB flags can be diversified. Can be done.

(Playability during CT)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, CT, which is an additional chance zone for adding the number of ART games, is performed between the MB flags. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, CT is continuously performed during the MB flags until the difference number reaches the end number (50 sheets). During this CT, if you do not win the flag conversion lottery when you win the role "push order bell", the difference number will increase and the duration of CT will be exhausted, while if you win the flag conversion lottery, the number of ends will increase as the difference number increases. Increases and the duration of CT is maintained. As a result, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, while changing the stop control during the MB flag, the CT is continued according to the combination of the displayed symbols (specifically, according to the result of the flag conversion lottery). Since the period can be controlled, the playability between the MB flags can be diversified.

At this time, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, since the probability of winning the flag conversion lottery is controlled based on the value of the CT meter, the duration of CT is adjusted based on the value of the CT meter. Can be done. In addition, this CT meter is promoted when the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" are determined as internal winning roles during CT, and is demoted when the winning combination is not won in the inter-flag lottery during CT. The player will be keenly interested in the result of the game during CT, and the game playability between the MB flags can be diversified.

In particular, if the CT meter can be promoted to "MAX", the flag conversion lottery will always be won for a predetermined period of time, so that expectations can be placed on subsequent games, and the interest of the game is high. Is improved.

(Combination of symbols that can be displayed between MB flags and MB non-flags)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, not only the combination of the symbols displayed at the time of winning the combination "pushing order bell" is different between the MB flag interval and the MB non-flag interval, but also the combination "F_single chili lip". The combination of symbols displayed at the time of winning "1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip" is also different. That is, while the MB non-flags are displayed, the combination of "replay" or "chili lip" symbols is displayed depending on the pressing order, while the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed during the MB flags. Only the combination of the "Chililip" symbols is displayed.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the flag conversion lottery is performed both between the MB flags and between the MB non-flags. The flag conversion lottery between the MB flags is to draw the target to be notified at the time of winning the role "pushing order bell" from the combination of the symbols of "bell" or "cactus", and also during the MB non-flags. The flag conversion lottery is to draw the target to be notified at the time of winning the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip" from the combination of the symbols of "replay" or "chili lip". By performing the flag conversion lottery between both the MB flags and the MB non-flags in this way, it is possible to control the combination of the displayed symbols both between the MB flags and the MB non-flags. It is possible to enhance the playability of both flags and non-flags.

At this time, the winning probability of the flag conversion lottery between the MB flags is adjusted based on the value of the CT meter, and the winning probability of the flag conversion lottery between the MB non-flags is adjusted based on the ART level and the lottery state. The flag. As a result, each lottery can be managed in its own mode, and the playability based on the flag conversion lottery is improved.

(Notification lottery on the sub side)
Since the stop control is different between the MB flags and the MB non-flags, it may be known from the combination of the displayed symbols that the MB flags are in the middle. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the originally unnecessary push order is notified during the MB flags, and it is difficult to grasp that the push order is between the MB flags. Then, by managing the notification of the push order on the sub side, the data capacity and the processing load on the main side can be reduced.

[Modification example]
Although the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this.

(Bernavi between flags and Bellnavi between non-flags)
For example, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, notification is performed on the main side by displaying a numerical value uniquely corresponding to the stop operation information on the instruction monitor. Since the mode of notification on the main side is basically the same in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, an example thereof is shown in FIG. 74 of the first embodiment. Here, in FIG. 74, while "white 7 navigation" and "blue 7 navigation" are performed during the inter-flag state, "bell navigation" and the like are not performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the inter-flag state is performed. You may perform "Bell Navi" or the like during the state.

In this case, the numerical value displayed on the instruction monitor may be different between the flag-to-flag state and the non-flag-to-flag state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 74 (A) and 74 (B), when performing "Bell Navi" in the non-flag state, numerical values "1" to "3" (pushing order second instruction information) are displayed on the instruction monitor. ) Is displayed, while the numerical values of "12" to "14" (pushing order first instruction information) are displayed on the instruction monitor when "Bell Navi" is performed in the state between flags as shown in FIG. May be. The navigation on the sub side performed via the display unit 100 may be common to both the flag-to-flag state and the non-flag-to-flag state. Further, the same applies to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, and the numerical value when "Bell Navi" is performed during the MB non-flag and the numerical value when "Bell Navi" is performed during the MB flag are different. May be.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not to give a privilege based on the result of the flag conversion lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the notification content is controlled based on the result of the flag conversion lottery, and as a result, the combination of symbols displayed when the notification-following stop operation is performed. It will be different. Therefore, the main control board 71 may give a privilege based on the combination of the actually displayed symbols.

In this case, the main control board 71 grants a privilege based on the combination of symbols displayed based on the notification performed according to the result of the flag conversion lottery, and is based on the combination of symbols displayed without following the notification. Therefore, the privilege may not be given. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the combination of the symbols displayed is different depending on the pressing order, so that when the player ignores the notification and performs the stop operation, There is a possibility that a special combination of symbols such as "triple chili lip" will be displayed. However, even if a special symbol combination is displayed as a result of ignoring the notification, the privilege is given only when the special symbol combination is displayed as a result of following the notification without giving the privilege. It may be that.

(Control of notification that does not affect profits (privileges))
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the notification that affects the profit is performed by the main side by performing a notification lottery (flag conversion lottery) and controlling whether or not the notification is performed on the main side. For notifications that do not affect profits, the sub-side will perform a notification lottery, and the sub-side will control whether or not to perform notifications. Then, as an example of the notification that does not affect the profit, the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment shows the notification of the "reach eye lip" during the precursory game, and the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment shows the notification. It shows the notification of "chili lip" during the MB flag. In this respect, notifications that do not affect profits are not limited to these.

In recent pachislot machines, the game may be changed to a state in which it is easy (difficult) to lock the game according to the order of stop operations. For example, transitioning to a state where it is easy to lock the game when the push order is "left, middle, right", and transitioning to a state where it is difficult to lock the game when the push order is "right, middle, left". There is. In such a pachislot machine, by notifying the push order, it is possible to shift to a state in which it is easy (difficult) to lock the game, but if whether or not to lock the game affects profits, , While it is necessary to control this notification on the main side, if whether or not to lock the game does not affect the profit, this notification may be controlled on the sub side.

It should be noted that the case where whether or not the game lock is performed affects the profit is, for example, the case where the game lock is performed as in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment and the ART lottery is won. There is (see FIG. 107). On the other hand, the case where whether or not the game lock is performed does not affect the profit is the case where the game lock is performed as an effect. For example, during a precursory game in which it is decided to give a profit (privilege). By making the game lock frequently, it is to show that the profit will be given in the subsequent game.

FIG. 113 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between the push order and the locked state. In the example shown in FIG. 113 (A), when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "left, middle, right" when the winning combination "F_maintenance lip A" is won, the lock state changes from "0" to "1". , "Left, right, middle" "middle, left, right" "middle, right, left" When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order, the current locked state is maintained, "right, left, middle" "right" When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of ", middle, left", the lock state changes from "1" to "0". Similarly, the same applies when the winning combination "F_Maintenance Lip B" is won, and when the stop operation is performed in the first pressing order, the lock state changes from "0" to "1", and in the second pressing order. When the stop operation is performed, the locked state is maintained, and when the stop operation is performed in the third pressing order, the locked state changes from "1" to "0".

In the example shown in FIG. 113 (A), in order to simplify the explanation, the locked state "0" is set to a state in which it is difficult to lock the game, and the locked state "1" is set to a state in which the game is easily locked. Of course, the locked state is not limited to two stages, and may be a number of stages of three or more stages, and in the case of three or more stages, the transition may be performed in multiple stages at once instead of transitioning one stage at a time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), when the game lock affects the profit, a notification lottery for whether or not to perform notification is performed on the main (main control board 71) side, and the lottery result is used. Based on this, both the main side and the sub side notify the predetermined push order. On the other hand, when the game lock does not affect the profit, a notification lottery for whether or not to perform notification is performed on the sub (sub-control board 72) side, and a predetermined push order is performed on the sub side based on the lottery result. Is notified.

Depending on the pachislot machine, there are pachislot machines in which the game lock affects the profit for the entire period of the game, and there are pachislot machines in which the game lock does not affect the profit for the entire period of the game. In some pachislot machines, the game lock affects the profit during a predetermined period, while the game lock does not affect the profit during a specific period of the game. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, during the period when the game lock affects the profit, a notification lottery for whether or not to perform notification is performed on the main side, and a predetermined push is performed on both the main side and the sub side based on the lottery result. While notifying the order, during the period when the game lock affects the profit, the sub side performs a notification lottery as to whether or not to notify, and the sub side notifies the predetermined push order based on the lottery result. May be.

Since the game lock is normally performed by the main control board 71, the main control board 71 has a function of transitioning the lock state according to the push order shown in FIG. 113 (A). That is, the main control board 71 draws a lottery whether or not to lock the game with a probability according to the lock state setting means for setting the lock state based on the order of the detected stop operations and the lock state set by the lock state setting means. When it is determined that the game lock determination means determines the game lock and the game lock determination means performs the game lock, the game lock determination means functions as a lock execution means for temporarily stopping the progress of the game. Then, the main control board 71 or the sub control board 72 is a notification lottery means for performing a notification lottery as to whether or not to notify the push order in which the lock state setting means sets the lock state in which the game lock is easy (difficult). , And functions as a notification means for notifying a predetermined push order based on the lottery result of the notification lottery means.

(Normally ART and CT termination conditions)
Normally, the termination conditions for ART and CT are not limited to those described above, and any termination conditions can be adopted. For example, the number of medals awarded during normal ART or CT, the number of unit games during normal ART or CT, the number of times that information advantageous to the player is notified during normal ART or CT, and the predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games). ) Can be used as one set, and any end condition such as the number of sets and the continuation rate at the end of one set can be adopted.

Further, as the number of medals given during normal ART or CT, for example, the difference number (net increase number) obtained by subtracting the number of medals used in the game from the number of medals paid out in the same game is used. May be. In addition, the number of medals given during normal ART or CT may be calculated based on the actually increased medals (calculation based on the actual value), and notification is given regardless of whether or not the number has actually increased. It may be calculated based on the number of medals to be increased according to the above (calculation based on the ideal value). In addition, the number of medals awarded may not be increased depending on the type of internal winning combination. For example, for some of the winning combinations that are unlikely to be determined as the internal winning combination, or for the combination that shows / hides the combination of symbols according to the timing of the stop operation, the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. However, the number of medals awarded may not be increased or decreased.

(Type of notification (press order, timing))
In addition, the content of the notification normally performed during ART or CT is also arbitrary, and the order of the stop operations (pushing order) in which the combination of symbols advantageous to the player is displayed may be notified, and the combination of the symbols may be notified. May be notified of the timing of the stop operation (design to be aimed at) required for displaying.

(Other)
In addition, as an advantageous state, the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to the re-game is not changed (or changed within a range that does not affect the game playability), and the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. It is also possible to use the so-called "AT", which activates the re-game high probability state (replay time) in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to the re-game is high, and the stop operation which is advantageous for the player. The so-called "ART" that notifies the aspect may be used.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 described above, various display screens are displayed on the first sub-display device 201 provided on the left side of the pedestal portion 10 (MAX bet button 11 and start lever 6 side). The present invention is not limited to this, and various display screens may be displayed on the second sub display device 202 provided on the right side of the pedestal portion 10 (the medal insertion slot 22 side). Similarly, a touch sensor may be provided on the display surface of the second sub display device 202, and the display screen of the second sub display device 202 may be switched based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
The pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. Subsequently, various functions possessed by the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 of the pachislot machine 1 will be described.

The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and in order to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the start operation detecting means, the symbol changing means, the internal winning combination determining means, the stop operation detecting means, and the reel. It functions as a stop control means and a winning determination means.

Further, when the combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as internal winning combinations during normal ART, the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery, and the result of this flag conversion lottery and other internal winnings. When the CT lottery based on the combination is won, the CT that normally extends the duration of ART is started, so that it functions as a conversion lottery means and an additional game starting means.

Further, the main control board 71 adds (extends) the number of ART games indicating the duration of the normal ART during the CT according to the internal winning combination. Specifically, the number of normal ART ART games is added by a predetermined amount according to the roles "cactus", "weak cherry", and "strong cherry", and the number of normal ART ART games is specified according to the role "triple chili lip". Add it.
At this time, when the number of times the number of ART games added based on the combination "triple chili lip" is added to the main control board 71 is 9 times or more, which exceeds 8 times corresponding to one set of CT, each time is reached. Functions as an additional control means to increase the additional amount

Further, the main control board 71 counts the number of games in which the number of ART games is not added during CT by using the CT game number counter, and when the CT game number counter counts 8, CT ends. At this time, when the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won (that is, the flag conversion lottery is won), the main control board 71 resets the game eight times in one set (the value of the CT game number counter is set to the initial value). (Return), functions as a counting means and an additional game ending means.

Further, when the winning combination (F_BB1, 2) related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 shifts the game state to the inter-flag state and until the bonus is activated in the inter-flag state (as a bonus). Since the role related to the bonus is carried over as an internal winning role (until the related role wins a prize), it functions as a bonus carry-over means. Further, the main control board 71 operates as a bonus when a winning combination related to the bonus is won in the inter-flag state, and shifts the gaming state to the bonus state, so that it functions as a bonus starting means.

As shown in FIG. 48, the main control board 71 becomes a bonus when the combination related to the bonus and the predetermined combination (off, F_special 1 to 3) are determined as the internal winning combination in the inter-flag state. Stop control is performed so that the combination of symbols (C_BB1, 2) according to the relevant combination can be displayed, and when the combination related to the bonus and the combination other than the predetermined combination are determined as the internal winning combination, the combination related to the bonus is determined. Stop control is performed so that the combination of the symbols cannot be displayed.
Then, the main control board 71 controls the instruction monitor of the information display 14, and is for winning the bonus-related combination when the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus-related combination can be displayed during the inter-flag state. The display of "10" and "11" (bonus instruction information) that uniquely indicates the mode of the stop operation is notified, and when it is impossible to display the combination of symbols according to the combination related to the bonus, "10" and "11" are displayed. Since the notification is not performed, the instruction monitor of the main control board 71 and the information display 14 functions as an instruction information notification means.

At this time, the main control board 71 notifies "10" and "11" via the instruction monitor only after the bonus notification is given. Specifically, when the main control board 71 determines the winning combination related to the bonus as the internal winning combination in a state where the winning combination related to the bonus is not carried over, the number of subsequent games is counted, and the counting result becomes a predetermined number of times. When the combination related to the bonus and the predetermined combination (off, F_special 1-3) are determined as the internal winning combination after the bonus is reached, the main control board 71 notifies "10" and "11" via the instruction monitor. , It functions as a counting means for counting the number of unit games since the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination.

Further, the sub-control board 72 manages the game history based on various command data received from the main control board 71, and when the registration operation is received from the player, the sub-control board 72 accepts the registration of the player who plays the game. It functions as a means and a means for accepting registration.
Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention, a display unit 100 that produces an effect according to the progress of the game and a plurality of display units 100 that are separately provided and include a top screen 211 and game information screens 213, 214, 215. The sub-control board 72 has a display unit 100 and a first sub-display device, and has a first sub-display device 201 for displaying the display screen of the above and a touch sensor 201a provided on the display unit of the first sub-display device 201. 201 is controlled. Specifically, when the sub-control board 72 accepts the registration of the player, the sub-control board 72 controls the first sub-display device 201 so that the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 can be displayed, and the registration of the player is performed. If not accepted, the sub-control board 72 functions as a control means because the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 cannot be displayed on the first sub-display device 201.

Further, since the main control board 71 grants various benefits according to the result of the game, it functions as a privilege granting means. Specifically, the main control board 71 grants a privilege according to the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line, and in the game in which the combination "F_3 selection bell_1st" is determined as the internal winning combination, "bell". When the combination of the symbols of "" is displayed, 9 medals are given, and when the combination of the symbols of "bell spilled eyes" is displayed, 0 medals are given. Further, the main control board 71 is the same as the operation of the re-game when the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" or "replay" is displayed in the game in which the combination "F_certain chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination. Grant the privilege of.
Further, the main control board 71 grants a privilege not based on the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line but also based on the result of the flag conversion lottery. For example, the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery when the combination "F_certain chili lip" is determined as an internal winning combination, and when the flag conversion lottery is won, a privilege such as winning a CT lottery is given.

Further, since the sub-control board 72 executes the effect according to the mode of the stop operation via the display unit 100, the sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as the effect executing means.
Here, the main control board 71 uniquely indicates the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player via the instruction monitor when the privilege to be given differs depending on the combination of the symbols displayed along the effective line. If the benefits given by the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line are the same, the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified. On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 executes an effect indicating the order of the stop operations regardless of whether the benefits given by the combination of the displayed symbols are the same / different.

Further, since the main control board 71 performs a CT lottery for whether or not to start CT, it functions as an advantageous state lottery means, and when the CT lottery is won, a predetermined number of precursor games are performed after the winning. Since CT is started after it is broken, it also functions as an advantageous state starting means.
Then, when the combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination during this CT precursor, the sub-control board 72 functions as a notification lottery means because the flag conversion lottery is performed on the sub side. To do.

Further, when the MB is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 carries over the MB as the internal winning combination until it is determined that the MB has won a prize, and thus functions as a predetermined combination carrying-over means.

Further, the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery when the winning combination "pushing order bell" is determined as the internal winning combination among the MB flags in which the MB is carried over as the internal winning combination, and thus serves as a conversion lottery means. Also works.
Then, when the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 win the flag conversion lottery, the combination of the "cactus" symbols is displayed for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Is notified, and when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the push order in which the combination of the "bell" symbols is displayed for each winning combination is notified via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Therefore, the main control board 71, the sub control board 72, the instruction monitor, and the display unit 100 function as notification means.

Further, the main control board 71 starts the normal ART when the ART lottery is won, ends the normal ART when the duration of the normal ART ends, and performs CT when the MB is carried over as an internal winning combination during the normal ART. To start, it functions as a first advantageous state control means and a second control means. Since the duration of the normal ART is not digested during the CT, the main control board 71 interrupts the normal ART and starts the CT when the MB is carried over as an internal winning combination during the normal ART. ..

Further, the main control board 71 counts the difference number of sheets during CT, and ends CT when the difference number reaches the end number of sheets. Here, the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery when the winning combination "F_pushing order bell" is determined as an internal winning combination during CT, and when the winning combination is won in this flag conversion lottery, the difference number to be counted is calculated. On the other hand, "6" is added, and "6" is added to the number of finished sheets to maintain the duration of CT. On the contrary, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, "6" is added to the difference number to be counted, and the duration of CT is exhausted. Therefore, the main control board 71 functions as a counting means, a second advantageous state ending means, and a conversion lottery means.

Further, the main control board 71 sets the value of the CT meter that defines the probability of winning the flag conversion lottery when the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination during CT. , Update to a value that is easier to win the flag conversion lottery than the currently set CT meter value, while if you do not win the flag conversion lottery during CT, the flag conversion will be more than the currently set CT meter value. Since it is updated to a value that is difficult to win in the lottery, it functions as a lottery stage setting means (first lottery stage setting means).

Further, the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery based on the value of the CT meter at the time of winning the combination "F_pushing order bell" between the MB flags (CT) in the ART gaming state, and the MB is not in the ART gaming state. Between the flags (normal ART), since the flag conversion lottery is performed based on the ART level and the lottery state at the time of winning the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4", the first conversion lottery means and the second conversion lottery means Functions as.

Then, based on the result of these flag conversion lottery, the main control board 71 gives a privilege, and the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the push order via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. The main control board 71 functions as a privilege giving means, and the main control board 71, the sub control board 72, the instruction monitor, and the display unit 100 function as notification means.
In addition, when the flag conversion lottery during CT is won (“cactus”), the main control board 71 gives a privilege of maintaining the duration of CT without digesting it (that is, extending the duration). , If you win the flag conversion lottery during normal ART (“Chiririp”), you will be given the privilege of adding the number of ART games.

Further, in the main control board 71, when the MB is determined as an internal winning combination during the normal ART during the non-flag of the MB, and then a predetermined number of precursor games are performed without the MB winning, the normal ART addition chance zone Since the CT is started, it functions as an additional game state start means.

Further, when the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination during CT, the main control board 71 normally extends the duration of ART and also serves during CT. When the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning the "push order bell" is won, it functions as a first addition control means and a second addition control means in order to extend the duration of CT.

Further, when the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_triple chili lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination during the normal ART during the MB non-flag, the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery and this flag. Based on the result of the conversion lottery, it functions as the first notification lottery means for determining whether or not to perform the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "chili lip".
On the other hand, during the CT precursor, when the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" are determined as the internal winning combination, the sub-control board 72 determines whether or not to notify the push order. The sub-control board 72 functions as a second notification lottery means.

Further, the main control board 71 starts CT when a predetermined number of precursory games are performed during the MB flag (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), and during the period during this CT, when the winning combination "push order bell" is won. Since the flag conversion lottery is performed, it functions as a lottery state start means.
Then, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display a combination of "bell" symbols when the winning combination "pushing order bell" is won during the precursory game between the MB flags (until a predetermined condition is satisfied). The required push order is notified via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100, and during CT (lottery state) between the MB flags, the combination "push order bell" is "bell" or "bell" based on the result of the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning. In order to notify the pressing order required for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "cactus" via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100, the main control board 71, the sub-control board 72, the instruction monitor and the display unit 100 notify the notification. Functions as a means.

The display unit 100 includes an irradiation light device B that irradiates the irradiation light, a screen device C that causes an image corresponding to the effect to appear by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B, and an irradiation light from the irradiation light device B. It has a front screen drive mechanism E2 and a reel screen drive mechanism F2 that switch between a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 as a screen device that causes an image corresponding to the effect to appear by irradiation with the above. Therefore, the irradiation light device B functions as an irradiation light device that irradiates the irradiation light, and the screen device C functions as a movable screen that causes an image corresponding to the effect to appear by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device. Further, the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 function as a drive device for driving the movable screen so that the position where the movable screen is arranged can be adjusted.

[Appendix 1]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 1 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, a game machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used for the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay is also widely known. For example, Patent Document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-223289) proposes a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is sometimes called an inter-flag RT, and the game can be played with a high probability of winning the replay until the bonus determined (carried over) as the internal winning combination is won.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, some pachislot machines having an RT between flags as in Patent Document 1 have been known so far, but simply increasing the winning probability of replay until a bonus is won is poor in playability, and further gaming. There is a demand for a gaming machine having a property.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having abundant playability between flags.

[Means to solve problems]

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a symbol display means) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. , The display window 4), the start operation detecting means for detecting the start operation by the player (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71), and the reel is rotated based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the symbol changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) that changes the symbol by making the reels, and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means, the stop operation is performed when the internal winning combination is determined. A push order combination (for example, F_ push order bell 1 to) in which a combination of a plurality of symbols including a first symbol combination (for example, a bell) or a second symbol combination (for example, a cactus) can be stopped and displayed according to the order of An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations including 6) and a plurality of reels are provided to stop each reel. The stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means (for example, the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71) for detecting the stop operation for causing the reeling, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stopping operation detecting means. With the reel stop control means (for example, motor drive circuit 39, main control board 71) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the determined timing. , Whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. When a predetermined combination (for example, MB) is determined as an internal winning combination by the winning determination means (for example, the main control board 71) and the internal winning combination determining means, the winning combination is determined by the winning determination means. The reel stop control means is provided with a predetermined combination carry-over means (for example, a main control board 71) that carries over the predetermined combination as an internal winning combination until it is determined that a prize has been won. When the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination in a game (for example, between MB non-flags) in which is not carried over as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means. While stopping the fluctuation, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped so that the second symbol combination cannot be displayed, and the front When the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination in a game (for example, between MB flags) in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carrying-over means, the symbol is determined according to the order of the stop operation. It is characterized in that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed on the display means.

According to such a game machine, the predetermined combination carry-over means carries over the predetermined combination until a prize is won when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and therefore has a so-called gaming state between flags. Here, in the pachislot machine, the reel stop control is performed according to the internal winning combination, but since the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination between the flags, the other combination and the predetermined combination overlap. Even if the same winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, stop control different from that between non-flags can be performed.

In this respect, in the game machine according to the present invention, when the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between the non-flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). Stop control is performed so as to stop so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operations. Take control. As a result, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to display different stop controls between flags and non-flags, that is, different combinations of symbols between flags and non-flags while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of combinations of symbols displayed between the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and it is possible to give diversity to the games between the flags. Specifically, by making the second symbol combination a combination of symbols corresponding to so-called rare roles such as cherries, it becomes possible to win a rare role by winning the push order role between the flags. , The appearance frequency of rare roles can be increased without changing the type of winning role and the winning probability.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification means (for example, the information display 14, the display unit 100, the main control board 71, the sub control board 72) for notifying the order of the stop operations and the predetermined combination carry-over means are used. When a predetermined condition (for example, a predetermined number of precursory games are completed) is satisfied in a game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination, a predetermined lottery (for example, F_ push order bell is displayed at the time of winning) for a predetermined period. The lottery state start means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the lottery state (for example, CT) for performing the flag conversion lottery for whether or not to cause the lottery, and the push order combination in the lottery state are determined as the internal winning combination. Then, the conversion lottery means for performing the predetermined lottery is further provided, and the notification means is a game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means until the predetermined condition is satisfied. (For example, in the precursory game of CT), when the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means is notified of the order of the stop operations required to display the first symbol combination. In the lottery state, when the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means is won, the symbol display means is notified of the order of stop operations necessary for displaying the second symbol combination, while the conversion is performed. When the predetermined lottery of the lottery means is not won, the symbol display means is notified of the order of the stop operations necessary for displaying the first symbol combination.

According to such a game machine, a lottery state for performing a predetermined lottery is provided between the flags, and a stop operation for notifying the state before the lottery state between the flags starts and the lottery state between the flags is performed. Make the content different. Specifically, before the lottery state starts, a notification for displaying the first symbol combination is always performed, and during the lottery state, when the lottery is won, the second symbol that is not displayed between the non-flags is displayed. A notification for displaying the combination is performed, and conversely, a notification for displaying the first symbol combination is performed when the lottery is not won. When the second symbol combination (rare role) is continuous, the player knows that it is between the flags. Therefore, even between the flags, the first symbol combination is intentionally notified to play the game. It is suitable because it can make it difficult for a person to understand the current state. Further, by controlling the notification content by a predetermined lottery, the frequency of the second symbol combination (rare combination) during the flags can be adjusted according to the lottery probability of the predetermined lottery. It is possible to provide a period having a predetermined playability, and it is possible to diversify the playability between the flags.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the conversion lottery means wins the predetermined lottery, or when the second symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display means based on the notification of the notification means, it is a privilege. (For example, the privilege granting means (for example, the main control board 71) for granting the privilege of maintaining the duration of CT) is further provided.

When a predetermined lottery is won, a notification for displaying the second symbol combination is performed. Therefore, according to such a game machine, the second symbol combination (rare role) is displayed, and a privilege is given. Will be done. As a result, during the time between the flags, not only the frequency of the second symbol combination (rare role) but also the privilege to be given can be adjusted according to the lottery probability of the predetermined lottery, so that the playability during the time between the flags can be adjusted. Can be diversified.

[Appendix 2]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 2 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, a game machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used for the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay is also widely known. For example, Patent Document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-223289) proposes a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is sometimes called an inter-flag RT, and the game can be played with a high probability of winning the replay until the bonus determined (carried over) as the internal winning combination is won.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, some pachislot machines having an RT between flags as in Patent Document 1 have been known so far, but simply increasing the winning probability of replay until a bonus is won is poor in playability, and further gaming. There is a demand for a gaming machine having a property.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having abundant playability between flags.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a symbol display means) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. , The display window 4), the start operation detecting means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the reel are rotated based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the symbol changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) that changes the symbol by causing the symbol and the start operation detected by the start operation detecting means, the stop operation is performed when the internal winning combination is determined. First combination (for example, F_pushing order combination 1 to) in which a combination of a plurality of symbols including a first symbol combination (for example, a bell) or a second symbol combination (for example, a cactus) can be stopped and displayed according to the order of An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including 6) and a plurality of reels are provided to stop each reel. The stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means (for example, the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71) for detecting the stop operation for causing the stop operation, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stopping operation detecting means. With the reel stop control means (for example, motor drive circuit 39, main control board 71) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the determined timing. When the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. When a predetermined combination (for example, MB) is determined as an internal winning combination by the winning determination means (for example, the main control board 71) and the internal winning combination determining means, the winning combination is determined by the winning determination means. It is specified that the predetermined combination carry-over means (for example, the main control board 71) that carries over the predetermined combination as the internal winning combination and the predetermined combination that is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means until it is determined that the prize has been won. The specific state starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the state (for example, CT) and the numerical information (for example, the difference number in CT) indicating the duration of the specific state in the specific state are counted. When the counting result of the counting means (for example, the main control board 71) and the counting means reaches a predetermined threshold value, the specific state When the specific state ending means (for example, the main control board 71) for terminating the state and the first combination are determined as the internal winning combination during the specific state, a predetermined lottery (for example, F_pushing order bell winning cactus at the time of winning) One of a plurality of lottery stages having different probabilities of winning the predetermined lottery performed by the conversion lottery means and the conversion lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) that performs the flag conversion lottery for displaying or not displaying. The lottery stage setting means (for example, the main control board 71) for setting the lottery stage (for example, CT meter) and the notification means (for example, the information display 14, the display unit 100, the main control board) for notifying the information of the stop operation. 71, sub-control board 72), and the reel stop control means is the first in a game (for example, between MB non-flags) in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means. When the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means stops the fluctuation of the symbol so that the first symbol combination can be displayed, while the second symbol combination cannot be displayed. When the predetermined combination is stopped and the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination in a game (for example, between MB flags) in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means, the order of the stop operations is When the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped so that the symbol display means can display the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination, and the counting means wins the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means. In the case of the predetermined non-winning of the conversion lottery means, the predetermined value is added to the numerical information counted by the player and the predetermined value is added to the predetermined threshold value. A predetermined value is added to the numerical information, and in the specific state, the second winning combination (for example, F_single chili lip 1 to F_3 consecutive chili lip 4) is used as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in the specific state. Depending on the determination, the currently set lottery stage is updated to a lottery stage that is easier to win the predetermined lottery than the lottery stage, and the notification means is changed to the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means. In the case of winning, the symbol display means is notified of the order of the stop operations required for displaying the second symbol combination, while the conversion lottery means is in the case of non-winning in the predetermined lottery. It is characterized in that the symbol display means notifies the order of stop operations necessary for displaying the first symbol combination.

According to such a game machine, the predetermined combination carry-over means carries over the predetermined combination until a prize is won when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and therefore has a so-called gaming state between flags. Here, in the pachislot machine, the reel stop control is performed according to the internal winning combination, but since the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination between the flags, the other combination and the predetermined combination overlap. Even if the same winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, stop control different from that between non-flags can be performed.

In this respect, in the game machine according to the present invention, when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between the non-flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). Stop control is performed so as to stop so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operations. Take control. As a result, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to display different stop controls between flags and non-flags, that is, different combinations of symbols between flags and non-flags while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of combinations of symbols displayed between the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and it is possible to give diversity to the games between the flags. Specifically, by making the second symbol combination a combination of symbols corresponding to so-called rare roles such as cherries, it becomes possible to win a rare role by winning the first role between flags. , The appearance frequency of rare roles can be increased without changing the type of winning role and the winning probability.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state is treated as a specific state for a predetermined period between the flags, and when the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination during this specific state, a predetermined lottery is performed. The content of the stop operation to be notified is different based on the result of the lottery. Specifically, when the lottery is won, a notification is given to display the second symbol combination which is not displayed between the non-flags, and conversely, when the lottery is not won, the first symbol combination is displayed. Is notified to display. From the player's point of view, the second symbol combination can be displayed between the flags (specific state) by performing the stop operation according to the notification.

Further, the specific state ends when the numerical information counted by the counting means reaches the threshold value, and the threshold value increases when the predetermined lottery result performed at the time of winning the first combination is won, and the numerical information increases when the numerical information is not won. Since the predetermined lottery is also related to the above-mentioned notification, when the second symbol combination is displayed (winning the predetermined lottery), the duration of the specific state is extended, and the first When the symbol combination is displayed (non-winning in a predetermined lottery), the duration of the specific state is exhausted.

As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the duration of a specific state is controlled according to the combination of displayed symbols (specifically, according to a predetermined lottery result) while changing the stop control between the flags. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the playability between the flags (specific state).

At this time, in the game machine according to the present invention, since the probability of winning a predetermined lottery is controlled based on the lottery stage set by the lottery stage setting means, the second symbol combination (rare combination) in the specific state is used. The frequency of the above can be adjusted according to the lottery probability (lottery stage) of a predetermined lottery. In addition, this lottery stage is updated (promoted) to a lottery stage in which it is easy to win a predetermined lottery if the second combination wins during the specific state. As a result, the player becomes strongly interested in the winning combination in the specific state (that is, the winning of many second roles makes it easier to win the predetermined lottery, and as a result, the specific state is changed. It will continue for a long time), and the playability between the flags can be diversified.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, as a state in which a game is played, in addition to a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and the specific state (for example, CT), information on a stop operation is notified to the normal state. When the player further has an advantageous state (for example, usually ART) which is advantageous to the player, and the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in the specific state, the advantageous state continues. An additional control means (for example, a main control board 71) for extending the period is further provided.

According to such a game machine, the winning of the second role in the specific state leads not only to the promotion of the lottery stage but also to the extension of the duration of the advantageous state. From the player's point of view, he / she will be more interested in the winning role in the specific state, so that the playability between the flags can be diversified.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the second combination, the number of specific symbols (for example, Chilean symbols) displayed on the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means is The additional control means includes a plurality of different types of second roles (for example, F_single chili lip 1 to 4 and F_2 consecutive chili lip 1 to 4 and triple chili lip 1 to 4), and the additional control means is described when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped. The second combination, in which the number of specific symbols displayed on the symbol display means is large, is characterized in that the duration of the advantageous state is extended longer.

According to such a game machine, the amount of addition for the duration of the advantageous state differs depending on the number of specific symbols displayed at the time of winning the second role, so that the playability between the flags can be diversified. ..

[Appendix 3]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 3 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, a game machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used for the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay is also widely known. For example, Patent Document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-223289) proposes a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is sometimes called an inter-flag RT, and the game can be played with a high probability of winning the replay until the bonus determined (carried over) as the internal winning combination is won.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, some pachislot machines having an RT between flags as in Patent Document 1 have been known so far, but simply increasing the winning probability of replay until a bonus is won is poor in playability, and further gaming. There is a demand for a gaming machine having a property.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having abundant playability between flags.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a symbol display means) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. , The display window 4), the start operation detecting means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the reel are rotated based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the symbol changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) that changes the symbol by causing the symbol and the start operation detected by the start operation detecting means, the stop operation is performed when the internal winning combination is determined. First combination (for example, F_pushing order combination 1 to) in which a combination of a plurality of symbols including a first symbol combination (for example, a bell) or a second symbol combination (for example, a cactus) can be stopped and displayed according to the order of An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including 6) and a plurality of reels are provided to stop each reel. The stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means (for example, the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71) for detecting the stop operation for causing the stop operation, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stopping operation detecting means. With the reel stop control means (for example, motor drive circuit 39, main control board 71) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the determined timing. When the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. When a predetermined combination (for example, MB) is determined as an internal winning combination by the winning determination means (for example, the main control board 71) and the internal winning combination determining means, the winning combination is determined by the winning determination means. When the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carrying-over means (for example, the main control board 71) and the predetermined combination carrying-over means, the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination until it is determined that the prize has been won. A specific state starting means (for example, the main control board 71) that starts a specific state, and a counting means (for example, a counting means (for example) that counts numerical information (for example, the number of differences during CT) indicating the duration of the specific state in the specific state. , Main control board 71) and the specific state are terminated when the counting result of the counting means reaches a predetermined threshold value. When the specific state ending means (for example, the main control board 71) and the first combination are determined as the internal winning combination during the specific state, whether to display the cactus at the time of a predetermined lottery (for example, F_pushing order bell winning). One lottery stage (for example) from a plurality of lottery stages having different probabilities of winning the predetermined lottery performed by the conversion lottery means and the conversion lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) that performs the flag conversion lottery of whether or not. For example, a lottery stage setting means (for example, main control board 71) for setting a CT meter) and a notification means (for example, information display 14, display unit 100, main control board 71, sub-control) for notifying information of a stop operation. The reel stop control means includes a substrate 72), and the first combination is an internal winning combination in a game (for example, between MB non-flags) in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carrying-over means. When determined as a combination, the symbol display means stops the fluctuation of the symbol so that the first symbol combination can be displayed, while the second symbol combination cannot be displayed and the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped. When the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination in a game (for example, between MB flags) in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means, the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the first combination is determined according to the order of the stop operations. When the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means and the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and the counting means wins the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means, itself A predetermined value is added to the numerical information to be counted, a predetermined value is added to the predetermined threshold value, and in the case of the predetermined non-winning of the conversion lottery means, the numerical information counted by itself is added. On the other hand, a predetermined value is added, and when the notification means wins the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means, the order of the stop operations required for the symbol display means to display the second symbol combination. On the other hand, when the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means is not won, the order of the stop operations necessary for causing the symbol display means to display the first symbol combination is notified, and the conversion is performed. When the lottery stage setting means sets a specific lottery stage (for example, CT meter “MAX”), the lottery means always wins the predetermined lottery during a predetermined number of unit games, and the lottery stage setting means. Is characterized in that when a predetermined lottery stage is set, the predetermined lottery is won with a predetermined probability.

According to such a game machine, the predetermined combination carry-over means carries over the predetermined combination until a prize is won when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and therefore has a so-called gaming state between flags. Here, in the pachislot machine, the reel stop control is performed according to the internal winning combination, but since the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination between the flags, the other combination and the predetermined combination overlap. Even if the same winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, stop control different from that between non-flags can be performed.

In this respect, in the game machine according to the present invention, when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between the non-flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). Stop control is performed so as to stop so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operations. Take control. As a result, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to display different stop controls between flags and non-flags, that is, different combinations of symbols between flags and non-flags while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of combinations of symbols displayed between the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and it is possible to give diversity to the games between the flags. Specifically, by making the second symbol combination a combination of symbols corresponding to so-called rare roles such as cherries, it becomes possible to win a rare role by winning the first role between flags. , The appearance frequency of rare roles can be increased without changing the type of winning role and the winning probability.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state is treated as a specific state for a predetermined period between the flags, and when the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination during this specific state, a predetermined lottery is performed. The content of the stop operation to be notified is different based on the result of the lottery. Specifically, when the lottery is won, a notification is given to display the second symbol combination which is not displayed between the non-flags, and conversely, when the lottery is not won, the first symbol combination is displayed. Is notified to display. From the player's point of view, the second symbol combination can be displayed between the flags (specific state) by performing the stop operation according to the notification.

Further, the specific state ends when the numerical information counted by the counting means reaches the threshold value, and the threshold value increases when the predetermined lottery result performed at the time of winning the first combination is won, and the numerical information increases when the numerical information is not won. Since the predetermined lottery is also related to the above-mentioned notification, when the second symbol combination is displayed (winning the predetermined lottery), the duration of the specific state is extended, and the first When the symbol combination is displayed (non-winning in a predetermined lottery), the duration of the specific state is exhausted.

As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the duration of a specific state is controlled according to the combination of displayed symbols (specifically, according to a predetermined lottery result) while changing the stop control between the flags. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the playability between the flags (specific state).

At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the probability of winning a predetermined lottery is controlled based on the lottery stage set by the lottery stage setting means, the second symbol combination (rare combination) between the flags is controlled. The frequency of the above can be adjusted according to the lottery probability (lottery stage) of a predetermined lottery. In particular, when a specific lottery stage is set as the lottery stage, the player will always win the predetermined lottery during the predetermined number of unit games, so that he / she can expect the subsequent games. The interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the game machine according to the present invention, when the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the specific state, the lottery stage setting means has a probability corresponding to the currently set lottery stage. It is characterized in that the stage is updated to a lottery stage in which it is easier to win the predetermined lottery than the lottery stage.

According to such a game machine, promotion of the lottery stage based on the second role will be performed with a probability according to the currently set lottery stage, so that the promotion of the lottery stage has a new game property. It can be made to improve the fun of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the second combination, the number of specific symbols (for example, Chilean symbols) displayed on the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means is The lottery stage setting means includes a plurality of different types of second roles (for example, F_single chili lip 1 to 4 and F_2 consecutive chili lip 1 to 4 and triple chili lip 1 to 4) when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped. The second combination, which has a larger number of specific symbols displayed on the symbol display means, has a higher probability of updating the currently set lottery stage to a lottery stage that is easier to win the predetermined lottery than the lottery stage. It is a feature.

According to such a game machine, the probability of promoting the lottery stage differs depending on the number of specific symbols displayed at the time of winning the second role, so that the game playability between the flags can be diversified.

[Appendix 4]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 4 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-057732), for the player, information for establishing the internal winning combination is provided so that the role determined as the internal winning combination is not missed in recent years. A game machine that notifies a player of advantageous information is known. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is called AT (assist time), and has an AT function. Game machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Conventionally, in AT machines and ART machines, navigation is performed under the control of the sub (sub-control) side, but in recent years, the presence or absence of navigation affects the profit of the player (so-called ball output). , It is required to perform navigation on the main (main control) side that manages the profits of the player. Here, when navigating on the main side, the navigator has a strong meaning of guaranteeing that profits are strictly managed, and it is required to strictly represent the current game situation.

However, in such a navigation system, there is a problem that the mode of the navigation system becomes monotonous and the variety of games is impaired.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of various navigations while appropriately performing navigations that affect profits on the main side.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state and an advantageous state (for example, CT) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state for playing a game, and a plurality of symbols are displayed. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R), a symbol display means for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols displayed on the reels (for example, a display window 4), and a main control for the progress of the game. A control unit (for example, a main control board 71) and a sub control unit (for example, a sub control board 72) for controlling an effect related to a game are provided, and the main control unit is a start operation for detecting a start operation by a player. A symbol changing means (for example, a motor drive circuit) that changes the symbol by rotating the reel based on the detection of the detection means (for example, the start switch 6S and the main control board 71) and the start operation by the start operation detecting means. 39, the first symbol combination (for example, replay) or the first symbol combination (for example, replay) according to the order of the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means with the main control board 71). A combination of a plurality of symbols including a combination of 2 symbols (for example, a reach eye lip) can be stopped and displayed inside a plurality of combinations including a push order combination (for example, F_reach eye lip A to D) with a predetermined probability. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining a winning combination, and a stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop operation detecting means provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel). The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. As a result, the reel stop control means (for example, the main control board 71) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the symbol when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. The winning determination means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the display means, and the advantageous state. When the advantageous state lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) for performing the first lottery (for example, CT lottery) and the first lottery performed by the advantageous state lottery means are won, the first lottery is won. The advantageous state starting means (for example, the main control board 71) that starts the advantageous state after the unit game has been performed a predetermined number of times, and the pushing order combination are internally applied. When determined as a winning combination, if the conversion lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) that performs the second lottery (for example, the flag conversion lottery) and the second lottery that the conversion lottery means perform are won, a special privilege is obtained. The reel stop control means has a privilege giving means (for example, the main control board 71) for giving (for example, CT winning combination), and the reel stop control means of the stop operation when the pushing order combination is determined as the internal winning combination. The fluctuation of the symbol is stopped so that the symbol display means can display the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination according to the order, and the sub-control unit executes an effect according to the mode of the stop operation. In the unit game of a predetermined number of times from winning the first lottery performed by the effect executing means (for example, the display unit 100, the sub-control board 72) and the advantageous state lottery means to the start of the advantageous state, the push is performed. When the forward combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it has a notification lottery means (for example, a sub-control board 72) that performs a third lottery (for example, a navigation lottery during CT precursors), and the sub-control unit said. When the effect executing means wins the second lottery performed by the conversion lottery means of the main control unit or the third lottery performed by the notification lottery means of the sub control unit, the symbol display means receives the second lottery. It is characterized in that an effect is executed according to the order of stop operations for displaying a symbol combination.

In such a game machine, when the second lottery performed on the main (main control unit) side is won, a special privilege is given, and the second symbol is given by the effect execution means on the sub (sub control unit) side. A notification is made to display the combination. Since the second symbol combination is displayed by performing the stop operation in accordance with this notification, the second symbol combination means a combination of symbols (for example, reach eyes) to which a special privilege is given from the player's point of view. It will be. Therefore, if the second symbol combination is displayed but no privilege is given, the player feels a strong dissatisfaction and loses his interest. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the main side determines whether or not to grant the privilege, and the second symbol combination is notified according to this decision, so that the notification that affects the privilege (profit) is notified. It can be managed appropriately on the main side.

By the way, in a pachislot machine, when performing advantageous control for a player, the advantageous control is performed after a predetermined number of games, for example, ART, instead of immediately performing the advantageous control. In the case of winning, ART may actually be started after several precursor games. During such a precursory game, it has already been decided to give a privilege (profit) to the player, so even if the second symbol combination is displayed and the privilege associated with this display is not given. , The player does not feel dissatisfied. That is, since advantageous control is performed when several precursory games are completed, the player feels that the second symbol combination displayed during the precursory game has brought benefits, which is a hobby. It won't hurt. On the other hand, increasing the chances of displaying the second symbol combination (for example, reach eye) that is displayed when a special privilege is given increases the variation of how to show the combination of symbols and improves the playability. To do.

Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification lottery means on the sub (sub-control unit) side is the first during the precursory game (a predetermined number of unit games from the winning of the first lottery to the start of the advantageous state). 3 Lottery is performed, and the effect executing means notifies the second symbol combination based on the lottery result. Although this notification is not related to the granting of the privilege as described above, the second symbol combination displayed when the special privilege is granted can be displayed by performing the stop operation according to the notification, and the game. Improves sex. As described above, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification that affects the profit (privilege) is managed on the main side, while the notification that does not affect the profit is diverse as a way of showing on the sub side. A certain notification can be made.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the privilege-giving means grants a privilege of winning the first lottery performed by the advantageous state lottery means when the second lottery is won.

Since the advantageous state starts when the first lottery is won, according to such a game machine, when the second lottery is won (as a result, the second symbol combination is displayed), the advantageous state starts. Even in this case, the second symbol combination is notified along with the third lottery during the precursory game until the advantageous state starts. From the player's point of view, is the display of the second symbol combination displayed because it is in the precursor game (that is, is it displayed as a result of the third lottery), or is it shifted to the precursor game with this display? Since it is not possible to know whether it was done (that is, whether it was displayed as a result of the second lottery), the player will be strongly interested in the flow of the game so far, and the interest will be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the privilege granting means does not grant the special privilege when the third lottery performed by the notification lottery means of the sub control unit is won, and the main control unit does not grant the special privilege. It is characterized in that the special privilege is given when the second lottery performed by the conversion lottery means is won.

According to such a game machine, a special privilege is given only when the second lottery performed on the main side is won among the second lottery and the third lottery which are the conditions for notifying the second symbol combination. No special benefits will be given if the third lottery performed on the sub side is won. As a result, the notification that affects the profit (privilege) can be managed on the main side, while the notification that does not affect the profit can be variously notified on the sub side as a way of showing in the production.

[Appendix 5]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 5 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, a game machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used for the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay is also widely known. For example, Patent Document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-223289) proposes a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is sometimes called an inter-flag RT, and the game can be played with a high probability of winning the replay until the bonus determined (carried over) as the internal winning combination is won.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, some pachislot machines having an RT between flags as in Patent Document 1 have been known so far, but simply increasing the winning probability of replay until a bonus is won is poor in playability, and further gaming. There is a demand for a gaming machine having a property.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having abundant playability between flags.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state and an advantageous state (for example, ART) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state by notifying information of a normal state and a stop operation as a state for playing a game. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. The symbol is rotated by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation detecting means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) for detecting the start operation by the player and the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the symbol changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, when the internal winning combination is determined, according to the order of the stop operations. A first combination (eg, F_pushing order bells 1 to 6) in which a plurality of symbol combinations including a first symbol combination (for example, a bell) or a second symbol combination (for example, a cactus) can be stopped and displayed, and a stop. A second role (for example, F_single reel lip 1) in which a combination of a plurality of symbols including a third symbol combination (for example, replay) or a fourth symbol combination (for example, chili lip) can be stopped and displayed according to the order of operations. 4. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations including F_2 reels 1 to 4 and F_3 reels 1 to 4), and the above. It is provided corresponding to a plurality of reels, and is determined by a stop operation detecting means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the internal winning combination determining means. Reel stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means. Based on the combination of (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the symbol displayed on the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, the internal winning is achieved. The winning combination (for example, the main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the combination determining means has won, and the predetermined combination (for example, MB) as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means. Once determined, the predetermined winning combination is used as an internal winning combination until it is determined by the winning determination means that the predetermined winning combination has won a prize. The predetermined combination carry-over means to be carried over (for example, the main control board 71), the notification means for notifying the stop operation information (for example, the information display 14, the display unit 100, the main control board 71, the sub-control board 72), and the above-mentioned advantages. In the state, and when the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means, if the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first lottery (for example, F_pushing order bell winning combination) The first conversion lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) that sometimes performs a flag conversion lottery for whether or not to display the cactus, and the predetermined combination as the internal winning combination by the advantageous state and the predetermined combination carry-over means. If the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination when it is not carried over, a flag conversion of whether or not to display the chili lip at the time of winning the second lottery (for example, F_single chili lip, F_2 consecutive chili lip, F_3 consecutive chili lip) A second conversion lottery means (for example, a main control board 71) for performing lottery) is provided, and the reel stop control means is a game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means (for example). , MB non-flag), when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means can display the first symbol combination, and while stopping the fluctuation of the symbol, the second symbol The fluctuation of the symbol is stopped so that the combination cannot be displayed, and the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the game (for example, between the MB flags) in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means. Then, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped so that the symbol display means can display the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination according to the order of the stop operation, and the predetermined combination carry-over means When the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination in a game in which the combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means is combined with the third symbol or the fourth symbol according to the order of the stop operation. When the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carrying-over means while stopping the fluctuation of the symbol so that the combination can be displayed, the symbol The display means stops the fluctuation of the symbol so that the fourth symbol combination can be displayed, while the display means stops the fluctuation of the symbol so that the third symbol combination cannot be displayed, and the notification means uses the first conversion lottery. When the first lottery of the means is won, the order of the stop operations required for displaying the second symbol combination on the symbol display means is notified. On the other hand, when the first lottery of the first conversion lottery means is non-winning, the symbol display means is notified of the order of stop operations necessary for displaying the first symbol combination, and When the second lottery of the second conversion lottery means is won, the second conversion lottery is notified while notifying the order of the stop operations necessary for displaying the fourth symbol combination on the symbol display means. In the case where the second lottery of the means is not won, the symbol display means is notified of the order of the stop operations required for displaying the third symbol combination.

According to such a game machine, the predetermined combination carry-over means carries over the predetermined combination until a prize is won when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and therefore has a so-called gaming state between flags. Here, in the pachislot machine, the reel stop control is performed according to the internal winning combination, but since the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination between the flags, the other combination and the predetermined combination overlap. Even if the same winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, stop control different from that between non-flags can be performed.

In this respect, in the game machine according to the present invention, when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between the non-flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). Stop control is performed so as to stop so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operations. Take control. Further, when the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination, stop control is performed between the flags so that the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination is displayed according to the order of the stop operations between the flags. Then, stop control is performed so that the fourth symbol combination is displayed. As a result, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to display different stop controls between flags and non-flags, that is, different combinations of symbols between flags and non-flags while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of combinations of symbols displayed between the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and it is possible to give diversity to the games between the flags. Specifically, by making the second symbol combination and the fourth symbol combination a combination of symbols corresponding to so-called rare roles such as cherries, the rare role is won by winning the first role between the flags. In addition to being able to do this, the rare role will always win in the winning of the second role, and the appearance frequency of the rare role can be increased without changing the type of winning role and the winning probability.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, if the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the flag period, the first lottery is performed, and the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the non-flag period. The second lottery is performed, and the content of the stop operation to be notified based on the result of these lottery is different. Specifically, when the first lottery is won, a notification is given to display the second symbol combination which is not displayed between the non-flags, and conversely, when the first lottery is not won, the first lottery is performed. Notify to display the symbol combination of 1. In addition, when the second lottery is won, a notification is given to display the fourth symbol combination, and conversely, when the second lottery is not won, the third symbol combination is displayed. Notify.

In this way, between the flags, the combination of the symbols to be notified based on the first lottery is determined, and between the non-flags, the combination of the symbols to be notified based on the second lottery is determined. In both cases, the combination of displayed symbols can be controlled, and the playability of both flags and non-flags can be enhanced.

Further, in the game machine according to the present invention, a privilege (for example, the first lottery) is obtained when the first lottery of the first conversion lottery means is won or when the second lottery of the second conversion lottery means is won. A privilege granting means (for example, a main control board 71) for granting a privilege to maintain the end difference number of CTs in the case of winning the prize, and a privilege to add the number of ART games when the second lottery is won. It is characterized by further preparing.

If the first lottery is won, the second symbol combination is displayed by following the notification, and if the second lottery is won, the fourth symbol combination is displayed by following the notification. According to the game machine, it is possible to control the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols (rare role) to which the privilege is given between the flags and the non-flags, and enhance the playability of both the flags and the non-flags. be able to.

Further, in the game machine according to the present invention, the first conversion lottery means performs the first lottery so as to win with a probability corresponding to a set first lottery stage (for example, a CT meter), and the above-mentioned When the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carrying-over means, the currently set first lottery stage is changed from the first lottery stage. Also characterized in that it further includes a first lottery stage setting means (for example, a main control board 71) that updates to the first lottery stage with a high probability of winning the first lottery.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, if the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the flag period, the first lottery stage is updated (promoted) to the first lottery stage with a higher probability of winning the first lottery. ). As a result, the player becomes strongly interested in the winning combination during the flags, and the playability between the flags can be diversified. In addition, when the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the flag, the fourth symbol combination is always displayed. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the third symbol combination is displayed. It is preferable because it can be grasped that the first lottery stage has been promoted.

[Appendix 6]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 6 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In addition, a game machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used for the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay is also widely known. For example, Patent Document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-223289) proposes a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is sometimes called an inter-flag RT, and the game can be played with a high probability of winning the replay until the bonus determined (carried over) as the internal winning combination is won.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, some pachislot machines having an RT between flags as in Patent Document 1 have been known so far, but simply increasing the winning probability of replay until a bonus is won is poor in playability, and further gaming. There is a demand for a gaming machine having a property.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having abundant playability between flags.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state and an advantageous state (for example, ART) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state by notifying information of a normal state and a stop operation as a state for playing a game. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. The symbol is rotated by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation detecting means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) for detecting the start operation by the player and the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the symbol changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, when the internal winning combination is determined, according to the order of the stop operations. A first combination (eg, F_pushing order bells 1 to 6) in which a plurality of symbol combinations including a first symbol combination (for example, a bell) or a second symbol combination (for example, a cactus) can be stopped and displayed, and a stop. A second role (for example, F_single reel lip 1) in which a combination of a plurality of symbols including a third symbol combination (for example, replay) or a fourth symbol combination (for example, chili lip) can be stopped and displayed according to the order of operations. 4. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations including F_2 reels 1 to 4 and F_3 reels 1 to 4), and the above. It is provided corresponding to a plurality of reels, and is determined by a stop operation detecting means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the internal winning combination determining means. Reel stop control means for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means. Based on the combination of (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the symbol displayed on the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, the internal winning is achieved. The winning combination (for example, the main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the combination determining means has won, and the predetermined combination (for example, MB) as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means. Once determined, the predetermined winning combination is used as an internal winning combination until it is determined by the winning determination means that the predetermined winning combination has won a prize. The internal winning combination is determined between the predetermined combination carrying-over means to be carried over (for example, the main control board 71) and the predetermined combination carrying-over means in the advantageous state not carrying over the predetermined combination (for example, between the non-flags of the normal ART). After the means determines the predetermined winning combination as the internal winning combination, if the predetermined combination is played a predetermined number of unit games without winning a prize (for example, when the precursor is exhausted), the duration of the advantageous state is extended. The second combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the additional game starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the additional game state (for example, CT) and the internal winning combination determining means during the additional game state. The first additional control means (for example, the main control board 71) for extending the duration of the advantageous state and the internal winning combination determining means determine the first combination as the internal winning combination during the additional gaming state. Then, a conversion lottery means (for example, a main control board 71) that performs a predetermined lottery (for example, a flag conversion lottery for whether or not to display a cactus when the F_pushing order bell is won) and the predetermined lottery means performed by the conversion lottery means. When the lottery is won, the second additional control means (for example, the main control board 71) for extending the duration of the additional game state and the notification means for notifying the information of the stop operation (for example, the information display 14, the display unit) 100, main control board 71, sub-control board 72), and the reel stop control means is a game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means (for example, between MB non-flags). ), When the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means can display the first symbol combination and stops the fluctuation of the symbol, while the second symbol combination cannot be displayed. When the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination in a game (for example, between MB flags) in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carrying-over means, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped. The fluctuation of the symbol can be stopped so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means according to the order of operations, and the predetermined combination is used as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means. When the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the game not carried over, the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means according to the order of the stop operation. In a game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means while stopping the fluctuation of the symbol, the second When the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol variation is stopped so that the symbol display means can display the fourth symbol combination, while the symbol variation is made impossible to display the third symbol combination. When the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in a state where the predetermined winning combination carry-over means in the advantageous state is not carried over, the notification means determines the symbol. A first notification lottery for determining whether or not to notify the display means of the order of stop operations for displaying the fourth symbol combination (for example, F_single chili lip, F_2 consecutive chili lip, F_3 consecutive chili lip is displayed at the time of winning. The first notification lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) that performs the flag conversion lottery for whether or not to make the player, and the internal winning combination in a state where the predetermined combination carrying-over means in the advantageous state does not carry over the predetermined combination. During the predetermined number of unit games (for example, during the precursory game of CT) from the determination means determining the predetermined combination as the internal winning combination to the start of the additional game state by the additional game start means. When the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, the second notification lottery means for performing the second notification lottery for determining whether or not the order of the stop operation is notified by the notification means ( For example, the sub-control board 72) is further provided, and the notification means is based on the lottery results of the first notification lottery of the first notification lottery means and the second notification lottery of the second notification lottery means. It is characterized in that information on a stop operation is notified.

According to such a game machine, the predetermined combination carry-over means carries over the predetermined combination until a prize is won when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and therefore has a so-called gaming state between flags. Here, in the pachislot machine, the reel stop control is performed according to the internal winning combination, but since the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination between the flags, the other combination and the predetermined combination overlap. Even if the same winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, stop control different from that between non-flags can be performed.

In this respect, in the game machine according to the present invention, when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between the non-flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). Stop control is performed so as to stop so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operations. Take control. Further, when the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination, stop control is performed between the flags so that the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination is displayed according to the order of the stop operations between the flags. Then, stop control is performed so that the fourth symbol combination is displayed. As a result, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to display different stop controls between flags and non-flags, that is, different combinations of symbols between flags and non-flags while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of combinations of symbols displayed between the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and it is possible to give diversity to the games between the flags. Specifically, by making the second symbol combination and the fourth symbol combination a combination of symbols corresponding to so-called rare roles such as cherries, the rare role is won by winning the first role between the flags. In addition to being able to do this, the rare role will always win in the winning of the second role, and the appearance frequency of the rare role can be increased without changing the type of winning role and the winning probability.

By the way, in a pachislot machine, when performing advantageous control for a player, the advantageous control is performed after a predetermined number of games (precursor games) are performed, instead of immediately performing the advantageous control. There is. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the game machine is in an advantageous state and the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination, that is, when the flags are between the flags during the advantageous state, the additional game state is started. A predetermined number of precursor games are performed before the start of.

As described above, since the stop control is different between the flags than between the flags, when the precursor game is performed between the flags as in the game machine of the present invention, the stop control (combination of displayed symbols) Therefore, the player may know that the game is in progress. For example, during the period between flags, the fourth symbol combination is always displayed in the winning of the second combination, and the third symbol combination is not displayed, while during the non-flags, it depends on the pressing order of the winning combination of the second combination. Since the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination is displayed, if the fourth symbol combination is frequently displayed regardless of the pressing order, the player may be in the middle of the flags (during the precursory game). Will be understood.

Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the period between the flags (during the precursory game), the push order (order of the stop operation) is intentionally notified. When the second combination is won between the flags, the fourth symbol combination is displayed regardless of the pressing order. Therefore, it is not necessary to notify the pressing order, but when the pressing order is notified, The player recognizes that the fourth symbol combination is displayed according to the notified push order (note that the fourth symbol combination is displayed depending on the push order between the non-flags, so that the fourth symbol combination is displayed in the notified game. When the symbol combination is displayed, the player can easily recognize that it is between non-flags), and it is difficult for the player to grasp that it is between flags (during the precursory game). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game between the flags (during the precursory game) from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the playability during the flags.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a main control unit (for example, a main control board 71) that controls the progress of the game, and a sub control unit (for example, a sub control board 72) that controls an effect related to the game. The second notification lottery means is characterized by having the sub-control unit.

In recent years, it has been required to appropriately manage the profit of the player on the main (main control unit) side, and the notification of the stop operation affects the profit. Therefore, the notification of the stop operation that affects the profit is the main. It needs to be controlled on the side. In this respect, the notification of the push order when the second winning combination is won during the flags does not affect the profit (that is, the fourth symbol combination is always displayed during the flags), so that the present invention In the game machine, the notification is controlled on the sub (sub-control unit) side. Since the main control unit has a larger capacity limit than the sub control unit, the capacity and processing load of the main control unit can be reduced by controlling the notification when it does not affect the profit on the sub side. Suitable.

[Appendix 7]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 7 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so that the role determined as the internal winning combination is not missed. There is. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). Further, a game machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay time (RT) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is high is sometimes called an ART machine or the like.

According to a game machine equipped with such an AT function and an ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation, so that the player can perform the AT or ART. You will want the period to last for a long time.

Therefore, in recent years, ingenuity to increase the period of AT and ART has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732), watermelons and cherries are specified as internal winning roles. A game machine that increases the number of AT games when the role of is determined is disclosed. According to this game machine, since the number of AT games increases according to the internal winning combination, the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and plays the game, which improves the interest of the game.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, the game playability tends to be monotonous, and a new mechanism for increasing the number of AT games has been required.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest in adding an advantageous state and allowing a player to continue a game without getting bored.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state for playing a game. There are a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. The symbol is rotated by rotating the start operation detecting means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) for detecting the start operation by the player and the start operation detected by the start operation detecting means. Based on the symbol changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the internal winning combination is determined from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) and a stop operation detecting means (for example, stop switch 7S, main) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. The symbol is displayed by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the control board 71), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. When the reel stop control means (for example, motor drive circuit 39, main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the means and the reel stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol, the symbol A winning determination means (for example, main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize based on the combination of symbols displayed on the display means, and predetermined conditions. When is satisfied, the additional game starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the additional game state (for example, CT) for extending the duration of the advantageous state, and the internal winning combination determination in the additional game state. According to the internal winning combination determined by the means, the additional control means (for example, the main control board 71) for extending the duration of the advantageous state (for example, adding the number of ART games) and the additional game state are described. The counting means (for example, CT game number counter, main control board 71) for counting the number of unit games whose duration is not extended by the additional control means, and the counting result of the counting means are set to a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times). When it reaches, the additional game ending means for ending the additional game state. (For example, the main control board 71) is provided.

In such a game machine, when the game shifts to the additional game state, the duration of the advantageous state is extended (addition is performed) until the counting means counts a predetermined number of times. Here, the counting means counts the number of unit games whose duration is not extended (the addition is not performed) during the additional game state, that is, when the addition is performed during the additional game state, the unit game Since the number of times is not counted, the additional game state will continue for a long time as the addition is performed. For the player, it is not known how long the additional game state will continue, and as long as the additional game state is performed during the additional game state, the additional game state will not end, so for the game during the additional game state. It is possible to continue the game without getting bored by having a strong interest, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the additional game state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first combination (for example, F_certain chili lip, F_1 certain chili lip) is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, the conversion lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery. (For example, the main control board 71) is further provided, and the additional control means, when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, wins the predetermined lottery to obtain the duration. In addition to extending the first additional amount, when the second combination (for example, cactus, weak cherry, strong cherry) is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, the duration is extended by the second additional amount. The counting means is characterized in that when the duration is extended in response to the determination of the first winning combination as the internal winning combination, the counting result is returned to the initial value.

In such a game machine, when the first or second combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the additional game state, the addition is performed, and the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination. When the addition is performed according to the above, the counting result of the counting means returns to the initial value. As a result, for example, even if the additional game state is just before the end (the counting result is close to the predetermined number of times), the additional game state is restarted from the beginning by performing the additional game according to the first combination. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the additional game state.

In addition, the addition based on the first combination (addition to return the counting result to the initial value) is performed only when the first combination wins a predetermined lottery when it is determined as the internal winning combination. It is possible to prevent an excessive profit from being given, and to balance the profits of the player and the game store.

[Appendix 8]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 8 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that notifies a player of information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so that the role determined as the internal winning combination is not missed. There is. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). Further, a game machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay time (RT) in which the probability that replay (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is high is sometimes called an ART machine or the like.

According to a game machine equipped with such an AT function and an ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation, so that the player can perform the AT or ART. You will want the period to last for a long time.

Therefore, in recent years, ingenuity to increase the period of AT and ART has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057732), watermelons and cherries are specified as internal winning roles. A game machine that increases the number of AT games when the role of is determined is disclosed. According to this game machine, since the number of AT games increases according to the internal winning combination, the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and plays the game, which improves the interest of the game.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine of the patent document, since the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, the game playability tends to be monotonous, and a new mechanism for increasing the number of AT games has been required.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest in adding an advantageous state and allowing a player to continue a game without getting bored.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state for playing a game. There are a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. The symbol is rotated by rotating the start operation detecting means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) for detecting the start operation by the player and the start operation detected by the start operation detecting means. Based on the symbol changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the internal winning combination is determined from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) and a stop operation detecting means (for example, stop switch 7S, main) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. The symbol is displayed by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the control board 71), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. When the reel stop control means (for example, motor drive circuit 39, main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the means and the reel stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol, the symbol A winning determination means (for example, main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize based on the combination of symbols displayed on the display means, and predetermined conditions. When is satisfied, the additional game starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the additional game state (for example, CT) for extending the duration of the advantageous state, and the internal winning combination determination in the additional game state. An additional control means (for example, the main control board 71) for extending the duration of the advantageous state and the additional gaming state according to the predetermined combination (for example, triple chili lip) determined by the means as the internal winning combination. In the counting means (for example, CT game number counter, main control board 71) for counting the number of unit games whose duration is not extended by the additional control means, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) by the counting means. When the unit game is counted, the additional game state is terminated. The additional game ending means (for example, the main control board 71) is provided, and the additional control means has the predetermined combination when the number of times of extension of the duration during the additional game state is equal to or less than a specific number of times. The duration is extended by the first additional amount (for example, 10 games) according to the determination of the internal winning combination, and when the number of extensions exceeds the specified number, the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It is characterized in that the duration is extended by a second additional amount (for example, 20 games) larger than the first additional amount according to what is done.

In such a game machine, when the game shifts to the additional game state, the duration of the advantageous state is extended (addition is performed) until the counting means counts a predetermined number of times. Here, the counting means counts the number of unit games whose duration is not extended (the addition is not performed) during the additional game state, that is, when the addition is performed during the additional game state, the unit game Since the number of times is not counted, the additional game state will continue for a long time as the addition is performed. For the player, it is not known how long the additional game state will continue, and as long as the additional game state is performed during the additional game state, the additional game state will not end, so for the game during the additional game state. It is possible to continue the game without getting bored by having a strong interest, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the additional game state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the number of times of addition (the number of times of extension of the duration) that is triggered by a predetermined combination exceeds a specific number of times, the amount to be added per time is calculated from the first addition amount. Increase to the second additional amount. As described above, since the addition is performed, the counting by the counting means is not performed and the additional game state continues. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the more the additional game state continues, the more the additional amount per time increases. It is possible to have expectations about the game, and to enhance the interest of the game during the additional game state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the counting means returns the counting result to the initial value when the duration is extended in response to the determination of the predetermined winning combination as the internal winning combination. And.

According to such a game machine, when the addition is performed triggered by a predetermined combination, the counting result of the counting means returns to the initial value. As a result, for example, even if the additional game state is just before the end (the counting result is close to the predetermined number of times), the additional game state is restarted from the beginning by performing the additional game with the predetermined combination as an opportunity. Therefore, it is possible to expect an increase in the amount of addition per time. Here, if the additional game state is not restarted, the winning probability of the predetermined combination must be set to a certain probability or higher in order to have the game property of increasing the additional amount per time, and the balance of the game is lost. Although there is a possibility that it will be added, by resuming the additional game state, even if the winning probability of the predetermined role is suppressed, it is possible to have the game property of increasing the additional amount per time, and the balance of the game can be balanced. It is possible to have high playability while trying.

[Appendix 9]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 9 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-057732), for the player, information for establishing the internal winning combination is provided so that the role determined as the internal winning combination is not missed in recent years. A game machine that notifies a player of advantageous information is known. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is called AT (assist time), and has an AT function. Game machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Conventionally, in AT machines and ART machines, navigation is performed under the control of the sub (sub-control) side, but in recent years, the presence or absence of navigation affects the profit of the player (so-called ball output). , It is required to perform navigation on the main (main control) side that manages the profits of the player. As an example of such a navigation, a navigation for winning a bonus role at the time of winning the bonus role can be considered.

By the way, when navigating under the control of the sub side as in the past, the navigation has a meaning as a production, and a navigation like a production that suggests the game situation in order to realize various game characteristics is provided. Since it is possible, for example, even when the bonus role cannot be won, it is possible to navigate by aiming at the bonus symbol. On the other hand, when navigating on the main side that manages profits, the navigator has a strong meaning of guaranteeing that profits are strictly managed, and it is required to strictly represent the current game situation. For example, it is not possible to perform navigation for winning a bonus role at a timing when the bonus role cannot be won.

Here, in the pachislot machine, when the bonus role and the other role are won in duplicate, the other role may be drawn in with priority over the bonus role, so the bonus role is won. However, the bonus role does not always win, and it is required to navigate at an appropriate timing.

The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide navigation for winning a bonus combination at an appropriate timing on the main side.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and a bonus state (for example, a bonus state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state for playing a game. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. The main control unit (for example, the main control board 71) for controlling the progress of the game and the sub control unit (for example, the sub control board 72) for controlling the effect related to the game are provided, and the main control unit is a player. A symbol that changes the symbol by rotating the reel based on the start operation detecting means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) that detects the start operation by the start operation detecting means and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the variable means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the start operation detection means, the internal winning combination is determined with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations. Means (for example, main control board 71) and stop operation detecting means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. Is displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. A combination of a reel stop control means (for example, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol and the symbol displayed on the symbol display means when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. Based on the above, a winning combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize, and the internal winning combination determining means provide an internal winning combination. Once determined as a combination, the bonus carry-over means (for example, the main control board 71) that carries over the bonus combination as an internal winning combination and the winning determination means until it is determined by the winning determination means that the bonus combination has won a prize. When it is determined that the bonus combination has been won, the bonus starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the bonus state and the instruction information notifying means for notifying the instruction information uniquely indicating the mode of the stop operation. (For example, information display 14, main control board 71), and the above-mentioned instruction. The information notification means is used when the first combination (for example, F_special combinations 1 to 3) is determined as the internal winning combination in addition to the bonus combination in the game in which the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination. , While notifying the bonus instruction information indicating the mode of the stop operation for winning the bonus combination, the second combination (for example, F_maintenance lip A) is determined as the internal winning combination in addition to the bonus combination. In this case, the reel stop control means does not notify the bonus instruction information, and when the bonus combination and the first combination are determined as internal winning combinations, the reel stop control means obtains a combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination. While stopping the fluctuation of the symbol so that it can be displayed on the symbol display means, when the bonus combination and the second combination are determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the bonus combination is the symbol display means. It is characterized by stopping the fluctuation of the symbol so that it cannot be displayed on the reel.

In such a game machine, the instruction information notification means possessed by the main control unit is used to notify the bonus instruction information that uniquely indicates the mode of the stop operation for winning the bonus combination, so that the bonus instruction information is controlled under the control of the main side. You can navigate to win a bonus role. Here, the bonus instruction information is notified when the first combination that can display the combination of symbols according to the bonus combination on the symbol display means is won together with the bonus combination, and the combination of symbols according to the bonus combination is displayed as a symbol. If the second combination that cannot be displayed on the means is won together with the bonus combination, it will not be notified. Therefore, according to the navigation by the main control unit of the game machine according to the present invention, it is possible to perform the navigation for winning the bonus combination at an appropriate timing.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the main control unit is after the internal winning combination determining means determines the bonus combination as the internal winning combination in a state where the bonus carry-over means does not carry over the bonus combination. When the counting means (for example, the main control board 71) for counting the number of unit games and the internal winning combination determining means determine the bonus combination as the internal winning combination in a state where the bonus carry-over means does not carry over the bonus combination. A means for determining the number of precursory games (for example, the main control board 71), which indicates the number of unit games until the bonus notification is performed to announce that the bonus combination has been carried over, is further added. The instruction information notifying means does not notify the bonus instruction information until the counting means counts the unit games for the number of precursor games, and the counting means does not notify the unit games for the number of precursor games. When the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination in addition to the bonus combination after counting, the bonus instruction information is notified.

When the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the bonus combination may be notified after the bonus combination has been won and played a predetermined number of times. For example, it is generally performed to enhance the effect of the effect by performing an effect (so-called continuous effect) performed over a plurality of games and notifying the presence or absence of winning of a bonus role according to the result of the continuous effect. There is. In this case, if the bonus instruction information is notified on the main side during the continuous production, the meaning of the continuous production may be diminished and the interest may be impaired. Here, since the capacity of the main control unit is limited, it is preferable to control the production on the sub (sub control unit) side in order to perform various productions with a high production effect, while managing profits. The main control unit cannot receive a signal from the outside, and is required to devise a way to appropriately grasp the timing at which the continuous effect controlled on the sub side ends.

In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the main side determines the number of precursor games until the bonus is announced, and determines the bonus combination as the internal winning combination for the unit game. Count the number of times. Then, when the counting result reaches the number of precursory games, the bonus instruction information is notified. Since the signal can be notified from the main side to the sub side, by controlling the production according to the number of games in which the bonus instruction information is notified on the sub side, for example, the bonus is given on the main side during the continuous production. The instruction information is not notified. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to perform navigation for winning a bonus combination at an appropriate timing on the main side while ensuring a variety of productions.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and a bonus state (for example, a bonus state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state for playing a game. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. ), A main control unit (for example, the main control board 71) that controls the progress of the game, and a sub control unit (for example, the sub control board 72) that controls the effect related to the game. The symbol is changed by rotating the reel based on the start operation detecting means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) for detecting the start operation by the player and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the symbol changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the first stop operation is performed according to the order of the stop operations when the internal winning combination is determined. A plurality of combinations including a push order combination (for example, F_3 selection bell_1st) in which a combination of a plurality of symbols including a symbol combination (for example, a bell) or a second symbol combination (for example, a bell spill) can be stopped and displayed. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from the inside, and a stop operation provided corresponding to the plurality of reels to stop each reel are detected. Based on the stop operation detecting means (for example, the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stopping operation detecting means. The reel stop control means (for example, the main control board 71) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel, and the reel stop control means stop the fluctuation of the symbol. When this is done, a winning determination means (for example, a main control board) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won a prize based on the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means. 71) and, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, the bonus combination is carried over as the internal winning combination until it is determined by the winning determination means that the bonus combination has won. The carry-over means (for example, the main control board 71) and the winning determination means provide the bonus combination. When it is determined that the prize has been won, the bonus starting means for starting the bonus state (for example, the main control board 71) and the instruction information notifying means for notifying the instruction information uniquely indicating the mode of the stop operation (for example, information display). In a game in which the bonus combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the instruction information notification means has a device 14, a main control board 71), and a predetermined combination (for example, F_special combination) in addition to the bonus combination. When 1 to 3) are determined as the internal winning combination, the bonus instruction information indicating the mode of the stop operation for winning the bonus combination is notified, while the pushing order combination is added to the bonus combination. When the internal winning combination is determined, the push order combination first instruction information indicating the mode of the stop operation for displaying the first symbol combination on the symbol display means is provided without notifying the bonus instruction information. In a game in which the bonus combination is not determined as the internal winning combination, when the pushing order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop for displaying the first symbol combination on the symbol display means. The push order combination second instruction information different from the push order combination first instruction information indicating the mode of operation is notified, and in the reel stop control means, the bonus combination and the predetermined combination are determined as internal winning combinations. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped so that the symbol display means can display the combination of symbols, while the bonus combination and the push order combination are determined as the internal winning combination. The combination of symbols according to the bonus combination cannot be displayed on the symbol display means, and the variation of the symbols is stopped.

According to such a game machine, when the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the instruction information notified by the instruction information notification means is the case where the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination together with the pushing order combination. Is the first instruction information for the push order combination, while it is the second instruction information for the push order combination when the bonus combination is not determined as the internal winning combination together with the push order combination. Both the push order combination first instruction information and the push order combination second instruction information indicate the mode of the stop operation for displaying the first symbol combination. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the instruction information notification From the type of notification of the push order combination by means, it is possible to grasp whether or not the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination in addition to the push order combination.

[Appendix 10]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 10 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

Further, in recent years, as shown in Patent Document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-075305), a gaming machine that cooperates with a mobile phone or a smartphone owned by a player is also known. In such a game machine, by registering a player in cooperation with a mobile phone or the like, it is possible to manage the game history unique to the player and provide individual services that have never existed before. ..

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, it cannot be said that the convenience of the player is always high in the conventional player registration type game machine, and a device for further enhancing the convenience of the player has been required.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to improve convenience in a player registration type gaming machine.

[Means to solve problems]
The game machine according to the present invention is a game machine that advances a game by variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of rows according to the result of an internal lottery, and is an irradiation light device that irradiates irradiation light (for example, irradiation). The optical device B), a movable screen (for example, a screen device C) that causes an image corresponding to the effect to appear by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device, and a position where the movable screen is arranged can be adjusted. A drive device for driving the movable screen (for example, the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2), a history management means for managing the game history indicating the result of the game (for example, the sub-control board 72), and the history management. A top screen (for example, top screen 211) that displays an outline game history that is a part of the game history managed by the means, and a detailed game including the outline game history of the game history managed by the history management means. A display device (for example, a first sub-display device 201) separate from the movable screen that displays a plurality of display screens including a game information screen (for example, game information screens 213, 214, 215) for displaying the history. An input receiving means (for example, touch sensor 201a) for receiving input information for controlling the display of the display device, and a control means for controlling the display device based on the input information received by the input receiving means (for example, the touch sensor 201a). For example, the sub-control board 72) and the registration receiving means (for example, the sub-control board 72) that accepts the registration of the player who plays the game are provided, and the control means does not accept the registration. In this case, it is impossible to display the game information screen based on the input information, and when the registration receiving means accepts registration, the display device can display the game information screen based on the input information. It is characterized by switching the display of.

According to such a game machine, if the registration of the player is not accepted, the game information screen for displaying the detailed game history cannot be displayed on the display device, but if the registration of the player is accepted, the game information screen cannot be displayed. The game information screen can be displayed on the display device. Since the fact that a more detailed game history can be confirmed leads to an improvement in the convenience of the player, according to the game machine according to the present invention, the convenience can be improved in the player registration type game machine.

Further, in the game machine according to the present invention, a display device for displaying a game information screen or the like is provided separately from a movable screen for displaying an image according to the effect. For example, a game machine that displays a game information screen or the like on a movable screen can be considered, but with such a game machine, it is difficult to display the game history during the production, and in fact, with a conventional game machine, Various display screens could be displayed on the movable screen only when the game was not played. However, for the player, there are cases where he / she wants to confirm information other than the production during the game, and the conventional game machine that can display the display screen only when the game is not performed is inconvenient. In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the display device is provided separately from the movable screen, various display screens can be displayed even while the production is being performed on the movable screen, which improves convenience. To do.

Further, when the image corresponding to the effect is displayed on the movable screen in which the arranged position is operated as in the game machine according to the present invention, various information other than the effect cannot be displayed correctly while the movable screen is in operation. There is a risk. In this regard, by displaying various display screens on a display device provided separately from the movable screen, the movable screen can be operated and various information other than the effect can be displayed even when the effect with a high effect is being executed. It can be displayed properly and convenience is improved.

Further, in the game machine according to the present invention, the input receiving means is a touch sensor provided on the display unit of the display device.

According to such a game machine, since the player can input via the touch sensor, the display of the display device can be controlled by an intuitive operation.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided on the side of a pedestal portion (for example, a pedestal portion 10) having a substantially horizontal plane and the substantially horizontal plane of the pedestal portion, and is provided with a slot for inserting a game medium for playing a game. (For example, a medal insertion slot 22 provided on the right side of the pedestal portion 10) and a bet button (for example, a MAX bet button 11 provided on the left side of the pedestal portion 10) are further provided, and the display device is provided from the pedestal portion. It is characterized in that it is provided in the vicinity of the insertion port and / or the bet button on a surface that stands substantially vertically.

Generally, in a game machine, a medal slot is provided on the right side when viewed from the player on the pedestal, and a bet button and a start lever are provided on the left side when viewed from the player. Therefore, when proceeding with the game, , The player will operate the right side or the left side of the pedestal part. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a display device is provided on the side (right side or left side) of a surface that stands substantially vertically from the pedestal portion, and the display of the display device is controlled based on the touch input detected by the touch sensor. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a display device and an input device (touch sensor) for controlling the display are provided at a place where the player's hand is located during the game, and the operability of the player is improved. .. In particular, since the display device with a touch sensor is provided on the surface that stands up from the pedestal portion (horizontal plane), the player can operate the display device while placing his / her hand on the pedestal portion. As a result, not only the operability is improved, but also the fatigue associated with the operation can be reduced, so that the operating rate can be expected to be improved.

[Appendix 11]
The pachislot machine 1 of Appendix 11 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

Further, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-057732), for the player, information for establishing the internal winning combination is provided so that the role determined as the internal winning combination is not missed in recent years. A game machine that notifies a player of advantageous information is known. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is called AT (assist time), and has an AT function. Game machines are called AT machines and ART machines.

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Conventionally, in AT machines and ART machines, navigation is performed under the control of the sub (sub-control) side, but in recent years, the presence or absence of navigation affects the profit of the player (so-called ball output). , It is required to perform navigation on the main (main control) side that manages the profits of the player. Here, when navigating on the main side, the navigator has a strong meaning of guaranteeing that profits are strictly managed, and it is required to strictly represent the current game situation.

However, in such a navigation system, there is a problem that the mode of the navigation system becomes monotonous and the variety of games is impaired.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of various navigations while appropriately performing navigations that affect profits on the main side.

[Means to solve problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a symbol display means) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. , A display window 4), a main control unit (for example, the main control board 71) that controls the progress of the game, and a sub control unit (for example, the sub control board 72) that controls the production related to the game. The control unit rotates the reel based on the start operation detection means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) that detects the start operation by the player and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means. Based on the symbol changing means for changing the symbol (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the order of the stop operations when determined as the internal winning combination Depending on the situation, the first symbol combination (for example, bell) or the second symbol combination (for example, bell spilled eye) can be stopped and displayed as the first combination (for example, F_3 selection bell 1st) and the internal winning combination. When the third symbol combination (for example, triple chili lip) or the fourth symbol combination (for example, replay) can be stopped and displayed depending on the order of the stop operation, the second combination (for example, F_certain chili lip) is included. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability, and a stop provided corresponding to the plurality of reels to stop each reel. The stop operation detecting means (for example, the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71) for detecting the operation, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. Based on the above, the reel stop control means (for example, the main control board 71) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel, and the privilege according to the result of the game. Grant (for example, grant the privilege of paying out medals and shifting the RT game state according to the combination of displayed symbols, and granting rights to CZ, ART, CT according to the lottery based on the internal winning combination. (For example, the main control board 71) and the instruction information notifying means (for example, the information display 14, the main control board 71) for notifying the instruction information that uniquely indicates the mode of the stop operation. And, the sub-control unit has an effect executing means (for example, display unit 100, sub-control board 72) that executes an effect according to the mode of the stop operation. ), And the privilege granting means includes a case where the first symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display means and a case where the second symbol combination is displayed in a game in which the first combination is determined as an internal winning combination. Different benefits are given depending on whether it is displayed, and in a game in which the second combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the third symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display means and the fourth combination is displayed. When the same privilege is given and the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the case where the symbol combination of the above is displayed, the instruction information notification means causes the symbol display means to have the first symbol combination. While notifying the instruction information that uniquely indicates the order of the stop operations for displaying the above, the effect executing means indicates the order of the stop operations for displaying the first symbol combination on the symbol display means. Is executed, and when the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the instruction information notification means does not notify the instruction information, and the effect executing means combines the symbol display means with the third symbol. Alternatively, it is characterized by executing an effect indicating the order of stop operations for displaying the fourth symbol combination.

In such a game machine, the navigation that affects the profit (privilege) is managed by the main (main control unit) side, while the navigation that does not affect the profit is managed by the sub (sub control unit) side. Specifically, the first combination (that is, the first combination is displayed when the first symbol combination is displayed and the second symbol combination is displayed), which gives different benefits when the displayed combination of symbols is different. Navi (the benefits differ depending on the case) is performed by both the instruction information notification means controlled by the main side and the effect execution means controlled by the sub side, and the same benefits are obtained even if the combination of displayed symbols is different. The navigation of the second role to be given (that is, the second role is given the same privilege when the third symbol combination is displayed and when the fourth symbol combination is displayed) is on the main side. It is not performed by the instruction information notification means of, but is performed only by the effect executing means on the sub side. Here, the navigation controlled on the sub side has a meaning as an effect, and it is possible to navigate in a variety of modes, and it is possible to realize various playability. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, navigation that affects profits is appropriately performed on the main side that manages profits, while navigation that does not affect profits is performed on the sub side with diversity. Can be done.

Further, in the game machine according to the present invention, the fourth symbol combination is all all on a predetermined line formed by connecting the unit symbol display areas for displaying one symbol of each reel in the symbol display means. It is a combination of symbols in which a specific symbol is displayed in the unit symbol display area, and when the second combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the privilege granting means grants a privilege with a predetermined probability and the effect executing means. Indicates the order of stop operations for displaying the fourth symbol combination on the symbol display means when the privilege granting means grants a privilege in a game in which the second combination is determined as an internal winning combination. While the effect is executed, the effect is not executed when the privilege granting means does not grant the privilege in the game in which the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination.

In the game machine according to the present invention, when the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination and it is determined that the privilege is given, the navigation (navigation) that aims at the fourth symbol combination in which the specific symbols are aligned on the line. On the other hand, even if the second role is decided as the internal winning role, if it is decided not to give the privilege, the navigation is not performed. Here, since it is decided before the combination of symbols is displayed whether or not to give the privilege, the profit obtained by the player does not change depending on the combination of the displayed symbols. By controlling such a navigation on the sub side, for example, it is possible to execute an effect such as "aim at a specific symbol" according to the type of privilege to be given, and it is possible to secure the diversity of the game. As a result, navigation that affects profits can be appropriately performed on the main side that manages profits, while navigation that does not affect profits can be performed on the sub side in a variety of ways.

1 ... Pachislot machine, 3L, 3C, 3R ... Reel, 4L, 4C, 4R ... Display window, 7L, 7C, 7R ... Stop button, 71 ... Main control board, 72 ... Sub control board, 100 ... Dot display

Claims (2)

A plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are displayed are provided, and the reel is used by stopping the rotation of the reel according to the mode of the internal winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations and the stop operation of the player. It is a game machine that advances the game,
A notification means capable of notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player, and
A game control means capable of controlling a specific game capable of executing notification by the notification means, and
In the specific game, a variable means capable of varying the count value of the special meter at a predetermined variable value, and
When the count value of the special meter reaches a specific value in the specific game, an advantageous state starting means capable of starting an advantageous advantageous state as compared with the case where the count value of the special meter does not reach the specific value.
When the end condition is satisfied in the advantageous state, the advantageous state ending means capable of ending the advantageous state and
With
When the advantageous state ends, the variable means changes the count value of the special meter to a predetermined value that has not reached the specific value.
In a unit game in which the count value of the special meter is the predetermined value, when the special meter is fluctuated in a direction advantageous to the player by the predetermined fluctuation value, the count value of the special meter reaches the specific value. A game machine characterized by that. The variable means can change the count value of the special meter according to an internal winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations, and the count value of the special meter is also changed in the next unit game in which the advantageous state ends. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the minimum value of the predetermined fluctuation values can be changed in a direction advantageous to the player.

Images